ScanTools Plus User's Guide

®

®

ScanTools Plus

User’s Guide Publication Number 203 583 133

Copyright © 2008-2009 Scantron Corporation. All rights reserved. Use permitted only under license. Printed in the United States of America. www.scantron.com

5000i, DOSSIER, EZData, Image ScanTools, iNAME, iNSIGHT, OpScan, OpScan iNSIGHT, PrintFlex, RealTime OCR, ScanFlex, ScanTools, Scantron DesignExpert, SelfScore, Sentry, Scantron and the logo are trademarks, in the U.S. and/or other countries, of Scantron Corporation. Adaptec and USB2connect are trademarks of Adaptec, Inc. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Belkin is a registered trademark of Belkin Corporation. Citrix and MetaFrame are registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. in the United States. D-Link and DUB-C2 are registered trademarks of D-Link Systems, Inc. Internet Explorer, Microsoft, Visual C++, Visual Studio, Vista, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. SIIG is a registered trademark of SIIG, Inc. SPSS is a registered trademark and SPSS/PC+ is a trademark of SPSS, Inc.

ii

ScanTools Plus

READ ME FIRST! It is important that you read and are familiar with the following parts of this User's Guide BEFORE installing and operating ScanTools® Plus software. This User's Guide is a basic overview of ScanTools Plus software. Use online help to find details of the functionality of the software.

System Requirements Located in the Overview. Before you start, be sure that you have the right hardware and software on your system.

Upgrading/Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software Located in the Overview. If you are currently using an earlier version of ScanTools software—ScanTools (DOS environment), ScanTools (16-bit Microsoft® Windows® environment), ScanTools II, Image ScanTools™, or ScanTools Plus—be sure to review the upgrade instructions and considerations before you start. This is especially important if you plan to migrate your applications to the new software version.

Registering the Software Located in the Overview. You should register ScanTools Plus software online. Online registration is required for timely notification of downloadable updates and upgrades, and to perform the download operation.

Using Online Help Located in the Overview. Online help can be very useful and may eliminate the need for a call to Scantron Customer Support. If you do not User’s Guide

iii

know how to use online help, read this description and try it out on your system.

Training To ensure optimal use and to receive complete support, Scantron offers training on ScanTools Plus. Visit our Web site at www.scantron.com or call 1-800-336-3426, extension 6123.

Calling for Help Located in the Overview. If this User's Guide or online help does not have the answer to your question or problem, go to this description of how to get help.

iv

ScanTools Plus

T Table of Contents READ ME FIRST!

iii

System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Upgrading/Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software. . . iii Registering the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Using Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Calling for Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Preface

xvii

Document Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii Internet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx User’s Guide

v

Chapter 1: Overview

1

OMR Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Image Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 User Exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Calling for Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Outside the U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Within the U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Support Web Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Services Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Registering the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside the U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Within the U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Online Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16 16 16 16

Using Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Explorer View Help Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Help Text Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Printing Online Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Upgrading from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Upgrading from ScanTools Plus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Upgrading from an Earlier Version of ScanTools Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

vi

ScanTools Plus

Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Copy Application Files for Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Migrating from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Migrating from Image ScanTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Migrating from ScanTools II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Migrating from ScanTools (16-bit, Windows 3.x or later environment) . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Migrating from ScanTools - DOS environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 iNAME Image Archiving Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 iNAME Merge Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Image Enable Disable Utility Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 RealTime OCR Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 User Exit Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Chapter 2: Installation and Configuration

33

Before You Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Installing ScanTools Plus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Removing (Uninstalling) ScanTools Plus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 ScanTools Plus Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Scanner Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Paths for Applications, Profiles, and Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Confirmations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Chapter 3: Modify/Create an Application

63

Task Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Modifying an Existing Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Creating a New Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

User’s Guide

vii

Parts of an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Document Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Features of a Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Output Format Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Application Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Creating a ScanTools Plus Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Start ScanTools Plus Application Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Open an Existing ScanTools Plus Application for Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Select Application Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Select or Create a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Import a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Select or Create an Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Define Output Fields and Append Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Select Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Release for Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Close ScanTools Plus Application Module Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Making an Application Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Installing an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Deleting an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Chapter 4: How to Scan Documents

97

Task Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Parts of the ScanTools Plus Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Configuring the Context. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 The File Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 The Scanning Options Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 viii

ScanTools Plus

Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Scanner Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Edit Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Edit Correction Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Chapter 5: Editing Data

109

Task Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Modify an Existing Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Create a New Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Editing a Data File Using an Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Manually Edit a Data File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Modifying an Existing Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Using the Mouse to Display Fields in Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Changing Edit Profile Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Creating a New Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Creating a Copy of an Edit Profile for use with the Same Application . . . . . . . . . . 118 Post-Scan Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Selecting Edit Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Selecting the Application, Data File, and Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Starting the Edit Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Making Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Manually Editing Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Selecting the Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Using the Modify Data File Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

User’s Guide

ix

Chapter 6: Scoring Data

127

Task Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Modify an Existing Score Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Create a New Score Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Score During Scanning (Online Scoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Score an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Scoring). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Score Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 The Score Profile Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Modify or Create a Score Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Create a Copy of a Score Profile for use with the Same Application . . . . . . . . . . 135 Changing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Scoring an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Scoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Chapter 7: Converting Data

139

Task Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Modify an Existing Conversion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Create a New Conversion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Convert During Scanning (Online Converting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Convert an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Converting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Conversion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Output Formats for Converted Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Delimited ASCII (.DLM, .TXT, or .CSV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 x

ScanTools Plus

Fixed Length Records (.SDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPSS for Windows (.SPS and .DA1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOSSIER (.DSA or .DSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM 3881 (.ASC or .EBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y2K Compliant (.Y2K). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

144 144 145 146 147

The Conversion Profile Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Modify or Create a Conversion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Create a Copy of a Conversion Profile for use with the Same Application . . . . . . . 151 Changing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Converting an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Converting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Chapter 8: Archiving Images

155

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 iNAME Scan-Time Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Application Definition for iNAME Scan-Time Archiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 iNAME Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Application Definition for iNAME Merge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Starting iNAME Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Post-Scan Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Application Definition for Post-Scan Archiving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Starting Post-Scan Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

User’s Guide

xi

Chapter 9: ScanFlex Option

169

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Scanner Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 ScanFlex Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 ScanFlex Alignment Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Forms Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Printing Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 ScanFlex/PrintFlex Guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Chapter 10: User Exits

179

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner

183

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Form #223022 General Purpose Answer Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 801 Sample Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

xii

ScanTools Plus

Creating a New Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Creating a New Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Step 1: Checking Image Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Step 2: Creating the New Document and Adding the Background Form Image. . . . . 190 Creating the Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Selecting Document Image Format Settings in the Image Clips Window. . . . . . . . 197 Defining a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Associating a Grid with a Field using the Append Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Defining a Grid Using the Outline Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Step 1: Outlining the Grid Region and Scanning the Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Step 2: Defining a Grid Using the Outline Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Step 3: Restoring the 223022.tif Background Form Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Defining the Clip Region for a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Setting Clip Attributes for Post-Scan Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Defining a Date Field and the Associated Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Defining a Single Clip Region for Multiple Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Review of Field and Grid Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Defining and Using a Translate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Step 1: Defining a Translate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Step 2: Using a Translate Table When Defining a Field and Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 User’s Guide

xiii

Defining Linked Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Defining a Clip Region for Linked Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Defining Grids Using Copy and Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Step 1: Defining the Two Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Step 2: Defining the Two Grids That Will Be Copied: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Step 3: Copying and Pasting Grids to Other Positions and to Multiple Fields. . . . . . 240 Defining a “Comments” Field and Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Step 1: Defining the Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Step 2: Defining the Grid and Selecting the Clip Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Defining a Score Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 If You Need More Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner

253

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 General Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Preparing the 701 Sample Application as a Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Step 1: Selecting the 701 Sample Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Step 2: Migrating the 701 Sample Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Step 3: Selecting the Correct Document within the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Step 4: Adding the Background Form Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Creating a New Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

xiv

ScanTools Plus

Creating a New Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Step 1: Checking Image Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Step 2: Creating the New Document and Adding the Background Form Image. . . . . 266 Creating the Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Defining a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Associating a Grid with a Field using the Append Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Defining a Grid Using the Corners Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Step 1: Defining the Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Step 2: Setting the Design Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Step 3: Marking the Grid Region and Scanning a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Step 4: Defining a Grid Using the Corners Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Step 5: Restoring the 2216811.tif and 2216812.tif Background Form Images . . . . . . . 286 Defining a Date Field and the Associated Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Defining and Using a Translate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Step 1: Defining a Translate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Step 2: Using a Translate Table When Defining a Field and Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Defining Linked Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Defining Grids Using Copy and Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Step 1: Defining the Items Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Step 2: Defining the Grid That Will Be Copied:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Step 3: Copying and Pasting a Grid to Other Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Step 4: Defining Grids on the Bottom Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Defining a Score Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 User’s Guide

xv

Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 If You Need More Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Appendix C: Data File Format Appendix D: Glossary

xvi

309

311

ScanTools Plus

P Preface The purpose of this User's Guide is to help you install and operate ScanTools Plus software. The User's Guide makes the following assumptions: • • • •

User’s Guide

You know how to use a personal computer. You are familiar with the Microsoft Windows operating system. The computer you are using meets the system requirements. You have read the relevant manuals for your Scantron OpScan iNSIGHT™, 5000i ®, OpScan®, iNSIGHT™, or EZData® scanner.

xvii

Preface

Document Organization The ScanTools Plus User's Guide consists of the following: Chapter 1, Overview provides an overview and a description of the principle features of ScanTools Plus software. Chapter 2, Installation and Configuration describes how to install and configure ScanTools Plus software. Chapter 3, Modify/Create an Application describes how to create (define) an application by using the ScanTools Plus Application Module. Chapter 4, How to Scan Documents describes how to scan documents. Chapter 5, Editing Data describes edit profiles and the editing process. Appendix 6, Scoring Data describes score profiles and the scoring process. Chapter 7, Converting Data describes conversion profiles and how to convert standard ScanTools Plus data files into other data formats. Chapter 8, Archiving Images describes archiving image files. Chapter 9, ScanFlex Option provides a brief summary of the optional ScanFlex™ module. Chapter 10, User Exits provides a brief summary of user exits. Appendix A, Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner is a tutorial to help you learn how to use

xviii

ScanTools Plus

Document Organization

the ScanTools Plus Application Module with Image scanners. Appendix B, Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner is a tutorial to help you learn how to use the ScanTools Plus Application Module with OMR scanners. Appendix C, Data File Format describes the structure of a ScanTools Plus data file (.DAT). Appendix D, Glossary is a Glossary that defines terms common to ScanTools Plus software and scanning. The Index provides an alphabetic listing of topics contained in this manual.

User’s Guide

xix

Preface

Internet Access We invite you to visit our Web site at www.scantron.com.

xx

ScanTools Plus

In this chapter: System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3 Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11 Calling for Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12 Support Web Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14 Registering the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16 Using Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17 Upgrading from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 22 Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25

1

Chapter 1: Overview ScanTools Plus software runs under Microsoft Windows. It resides on a host computer attached to a Scantron scanner. It supports both OMR and Image technology scanners.

OMR Scanners OMR scanners process Optical Mark Recognition (OMR) forms. The source data is recorded on each form by filling in small circles (sometimes referred to as bubbles or ovals) with a pencil or pen. The marked forms are organized and placed in a scanner. Then the ScanTools Plus Scanning Module starts the scanning process. The scanner detects the marks as they pass under the read head and sends data to ScanTools Plus software regarding the position and darkness of each mark on the form.

User’s Guide

1

Chapter 1: Overview

Image Scanners Image scanners capture an image of the form as it passes through the read head of the scanner. OMR data is created from the scanned image in one of two ways, depending on the scanner model and/or user selection in the ScanTools application definition: •

•

OMR from Scanner - OMR data is created in the scanner and sent to ScanTools software in ASCII format. This method is optional for Scantron OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 scanners with the imaging feature. OMR from Image - OMR data is created from the scanned image that is stored in the buffer in the memory of the personal computer attached to the scanner; the image is accessed by ScanTools software. This method is always used when the configured scanner is a Scantron OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20, or iNSIGHT 30. It is optional for OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 scanners with the imaging feature.

For image scanners, in addition to the OMR data: • • •

2

All or part of the form image can also be transmitted to the host computer for use during data editing and for image archiving. An optional ScanFlex module can be purchased and used to scan plain paper, laser-printed forms that contain form ID marks and timing marks. An optional RealTime Character Recognition module can be purchased and used to scan and recognize machine printed and hand printed text.

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 1: Overview System Requirements

System Requirements To install and run ScanTools Plus software, you must have the proper computer hardware and operating system. If you attempt to install ScanTools Plus software on an unsupported operating system, you receive an error message and are unable to install. The requirements are different depending on which scanner you are using, and what action you are performing. To install or uninstall ScanTools Plus the user must have Administrator Rights. Scanners

PC Hardware

Operating Systems

OpScan iNSIGHT™ 70 OpScan iNSIGHT 150 5000i® with speed upgrade

Pentium® processor: 3.2 GHz, minimum System memory: 512 MB minimum (Windows Vista requires 512 MB minimum, 1GB recommended) Hard drive space: 650 MB of free space, minimum (1GB recommended). The required space may increase depending on the application's data storage requirements. Video Adapter with 24-bit color (recommended), 65K colors minimum Monitor at 1024 x 768 or higher resolution CD-ROM drive (for installation) Ethernet Adapter 10/100/1000 Mbps recommended

Windows Vista® Business Edition or greater, 32-bit Edition only. Windows® XP Professional SP2 or SP3

User’s Guide

All Windows hotfixes for the service pack must also be installed.

3


Scanners

PC Hardware

Operating Systems

iNSIGHT 20 iNSIGHT 30

Pentium processor: 3.2 GHz, minimum System memory: of 512 MB minimum (Windows Vista requires 512 MB minimum, 1GB recommended) Hard drive space: 650 MB of free space, minimum (1GB recommended). The required space may increase depending on the application's data storage requirements. Video Adapter with 24-bit color (recommended), 65K colors minimum Monitor at 1024 x 768 or higher resolution CD-ROM drive (for installation) Ethernet Adapter 10/100/1000 Mbps recommended USB 2.0 connection

Windows Vista Business Edition or greater, 32-bit Edition only. Windows XP Professional SP2 or SP3

Pentium processor: 3.2 GHz minimum System memory : 512 MB Hard drive space: 650 MB of free space, minimum (1GB recommended). The required space may increase depending on the application's data storage requirements. Video Adapter with 24-bit color (recommended), 65K colors minimum Monitor at 1024 x 768 or higher resolution CD-ROM drive for installation Ethernet Adapter 10/100 Mbps, recommended

Windows XP Professional SP2 or SP3

5000i

4



ScanTools Plus


Scanners

PC Hardware

Operating Systems

OpScan iNSIGHT 2 with Imaging OpScan iNSIGHT 4 with Imaging

Pentium processor: 866 MHz, minimum System memory: 384 MB minimum, 512 MB recommended (Windows Vista requires 512 MB, 1GB recommended) Hard drive space: 650 MB of free space, minimum (1GB recommended). The required space may increase depending on the application's data storage requirements. Video Adapter with 24-bit color (recommended), 65K colors minimum Monitor at 1024 x 768 or higher resolution CD-ROM drive (for installation) Ethernet Adapter 10/100 Mbps, recommended RS-232 connection - OMR processing USB 2.0 connection - Image or OMR processing If using a USB 2.0 Add-on card: Must use one of the following cards with the driver provided by the card vendor: • Adaptec™ - USB2connect™ 4000A, the driver depends on Windows system used: – Windows XP - do not install the Adaptec driver, use the Microsoft driver v5.1.26 dated 6/1/02 (default USB driver). If the Adaptec USB driver is installed, remove it. • Belkin® – F5U222 USB 2.0 PCMCIA adapter – F5U219 USB 2.0 PCI adapter • D-Link® - DUB-C2® - USB 2.0 Cardbus™ Adapter with driver v1.0 (not supported with Windows Vista) • SIIG® JU-PCM222 - USB 2.0 PCI


User’s Guide


5


Scanners

PC Hardware

Operating Systems

OpScan iNSIGHT 2 (OMR Only) OpScan iNSIGHT 4 (OMR Only)

Same as OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 with Imaging (above) with the exception below: Minimum USB 1.1, recommend USB 2.0 - OMR processing RS-232 - OMR processing

Windows Vista Business Edition or greater, 32-bit Edition only. Windows XP Professional SP2 or SP3 All Windows hotfixes for the service pack must also be installed.

OpScan 2 OpScan 3 OpScan 4/4U OpScan 5/6 OpScan 7/8 OpScan 9010M/9020M

Pentium processor: 866 MHz, minimum System memory: 384 MB minimum, 512 MB recommended.(Windows Vista requires 512 MB, 1GB recommended) Hard drive space: 650 MB of free space, minimum (1GB recommended). The required space may increase depending on the application's data storage requirements. Video Adapter with 24-bit color (recommended), 65K colors minimum Monitor at 1024 x 768 or higher resolution CD-ROM drive (for installation) Ethernet Adapter 10/100 Mbps, recommended RS232 connection or USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection (Keyspan USB Serial Adapter recommended, if needed)


OpScan 10 OpScan 15 OpScan 21

Same as OpScan 2/3/4/4U/5/6/7/8/ 9010M/9020M with the exception below: USB connection




6

ScanTools Plus


Scanners

PC Hardware

Operating Systems

EZData®

Pentium processor: 866 MHz, minimum System memory: 384 MB minimum, 512 MB recommended. (Windows Vista requires 512 MB, 1GB recommended) Hard drive space: 650 MB of free space, minimum (1GB recommended). The required space may increase depending on the application's data storage requirements. Video Adapter with 24-bit color (recommended), 65K colors minimum Monitor at 1024 x 768 or higher resolution CD-ROM drive (for installation) Ethernet Adapter 10/100 Mbps, recommended RS232 connection or USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection (Keyspan USB Serial Adapter recommended, if needed)

Windows Vista Business Edition or greater, 32-bit Edition only. Windows XP Professional SP2 or SP3 All Windows hotfixes for the service pack must also be installed.

Terminal Server/Citrix® environment is supported for these scanners: OpScan 2/iNSIGHT 2 (OMR Only) OpScan 3 OpScan 4/4U/iNSIGHT 4 (OMR Only) OpScan 5/6 OpScan 7/8 EZData

User’s Guide

For additional PC hardware requirements, see reference above for your scanner model. RS-232 connection required for scanners supported. All scanners must be the same model and configured identically.

Terminal Server 2003 / Windows Server™ 2003. Citrix MetaFrame 1.8 / Windows Server 2003 SPEFR3. All Windows hotfixes for the service pack must also be installed.

7


System Notes • The Fast User Switching function of Windows Vista and Windows XP is not supported by ScanTools Plus. Only one instance of ScanTools Plus can be running on a PC at one time, even when under separate user accounts using Fast User Switching. • We recommend an Internet connection and a web browser for accessing online product registration, support information, and product updates. It is not required for product operation. • Internet Explorer® v4.0 or greater is required for access to online help. Access to the Internet is not required. If you do not have Internet Explorer, you can download it from the Microsoft Web site (www.microsoft.com). • 5000i with speed upgrade and OpScan iNSIGHT 70/ 150 scanners with Windows Vista Business Edition must have the most recent version of the iPORT scanner drivers (v2.2.1) installed before the 5000i/ OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150 Utility Software and ScanTools Plus can be installed and run. • To download the iPORT scanner drivers, access: http://www.scantron.com •

•

8

Follow the installation instructions in the iPORT Install.pdf file to install the iPORT drivers. This file can be found on the Pleora Technologies iPORT Drivers CD if you are installing from the CD. If you downloaded the drivers from the web link listed above, the iPORT Install.pdf file will be one of the files that were downloaded. 5000i and OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150 scanners must have the most recent version of the 5000i/OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150 Utility Software (version 06.80000) installed before ScanTools Plus can be installed and run. See the 5000i/OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150 Utility Software Release Notes for installation before installing ScanTools Plus.

ScanTools Plus


•

•

•

• • •

iNSIGHT 20 scanners must have the iNSIGHT 20 Drivers and Scanner Utilities (version 1.10010) installed before ScanTools Plus can be installed and run. See the iNSIGHT 20 and iNSIGHT 30 Drivers and Scanner Utilities Release Notes for installation before installing ScanTools Plus. iNSIGHT 30 scanners must have the iNSIGHT 30 Drivers and Scanner Utilities (version 1.10010) installed before ScanTools Plus can be installed and run. See the iNSIGHT 20 and iNSIGHT 30 Drivers and Scanner Utilities Release Notes for installation before installing ScanTools Plus. OpScan 10, 15 and 21 scanners with Windows Vista must have the most recent version of the OpScan 10/ 15/21 System Files (v02.40000) installed before ScanTools Plus can be installed and run. See the OpScan 10/15/21 System Files Release Notes for installation before installing ScanTools Plus. The OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 scanner USB driver is installed during ScanTools Plus software installation. OpScan 2, 3, 4, and 4U scanners with the SelfScore® option are supported. OpScan iNSIGHT 2 and 4 scanners with the SelfScore option are supported, using a RS232 connection.

User Exits For any User Exit work, you must use a compiler that can create Windows Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs). Scantron has developed and tested user exits using the following development platforms: • • •

User’s Guide

Microsoft Visual Studio® .NET 2005 - Microsoft Visual C++®.NET. Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2003 - Microsoft Visual C++.NET. Microsoft Visual Studio v6.0, Service Pack 6 Microsoft Visual C++. 9


User Exits written for ScanTools II version 1.3 (and later) and Image ScanTools version 5.0 (and later) will run with ScanTools Plus. User Exits written for earlier versions of ScanTools software will require rework.

10

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 1: Overview Capabilities

Capabilities ScanTools Plus software supports: • Scantron OpScan iNSIGHT, 5000i, iNSIGHT, OpScan, and EZData scanners for application development and scanning • Use of existing ScanTools applications and profiles • Online editing, edit correction, file conversion, and scoring • Post-scan editing, edit correction, scoring, image archiving, and file conversion • Scan-time archiving using iNAME™ • The ScanFlex option. It allows scanning of plain paper, laser-printed forms with form ID marks and timing marks, only on image scanners. • The RealTime Character Recognition option. It allows scanning and recognition of machine printed and hand printed text, only on image scanners. • Command-line entry/context file invocation • The Download Plus Utility for OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 and OpScan scanners equipped with Download firmware for OMR applications. See the scanner Download firmware documentation and online help for more information. The following output format types can no longer be defined when creating or modifying conversion profiles. If you have existing conversion profiles with these types, you may still run them: • DIF • Fixed-80 file conversion format (available in DOS ScanTools software) • Sheet Compile • SPSS/PC+ • StatPac Gold

User’s Guide

11

Chapter 1: Overview Calling for Help

Calling for Help Outside the U.S. Contact your local sales agent for support.

Within the U.S. As a new licensee of ScanTools Plus software, you will receive one year of Software Subscription Service which provides new software releases including all updates and upgrades. Additionally, you will receive telephone support and access to our Web-based support at www.scantron.com, which contains valuable software information and documentation. Continued renewal of your support agreement ensures that you stay up-to-date, and use the latest software features, while maintaining fixed budget costs. IMPORTANT: Services no longer under warranty or covered

under a support agreement may be billable. The customer support representative will inform you if you require a billable service.

When you have questions that are not answered by this manual or by the online help system, call Scantron Customer Support. Your support begins on the date of shipment and is available from 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. Monday through Friday, customer’s local time (except for Alaska and Hawaii which is through 7:00 P.M. CST). Customer support is not available on Scantron holidays. Before calling Scantron Customer Support, follow the steps listed below: 1.

Check this manual, online help, and the support web site, www.scantron.com, for the answer to your question. If you can't find the answer, continue to step 2.

2. Record the sequence of steps leading to the problem. 12

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 1: Overview Calling for Help

3. Record the text of all error messages encountered. 4. Have your 9-digit software Serial Number available; it is displayed in the About ScanTools Plus dialog in the Help menu. 5. Be available at the scanning system. 6. Call Scantron Customer Support at 1-800-338-5544. When you call Customer Support, an operator will first ask you to describe the problem; then the operator will connect you to a Scantron Customer Support analyst. If the analyst is not available, he or she will call you back, normally within one hour.

User’s Guide

13

Chapter 1: Overview Support Web Site

Support Web Site Connecting If you have Internet access and an installed Internet browser, there are several ways to access the Scantron Customer Support Web Site: • •

•

Select Support on the Internet on the Help menu of the ScanTools Plus software main window. Use Start | Settings | Control Panel | Add/ Remove Programs | ScanTools Plus | Click here for support information to navigate to the Support Info dialog. Use your installed Internet browser to navigate to www.scantron.com.

Services Available The Support Web Site gives you access to the following: Outside the U.S. • Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) with answers about ScanTools Plus software and other scanning hardware and software products. Within the U.S. • Online registration of your ScanTools Plus software so that you can be notified of the availability of updates and upgrades. • Frequently asked questions (FAQs) with answers about ScanTools Plus software and other scanning hardware and software products. • ScanTools Plus software updates and upgrades that you can download if you have an active Software Subscription Support agreement. Non-downloaded software release distribution may incur a fee. • ScanTools Plus documentation and manuals.

14

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 1: Overview Support Web Site

• •

User’s Guide

Scantron Online Store offering a wide variety of standard OMR scannable forms and supply items to optimize your scanning investment. Training course information: syllabus, schedule, and online registration.

15

Chapter 1: Overview Registering the Software

Registering the Software Outside the U.S. Contact your local sales agent for for product support, registration, and update information..

Within the U.S. Software registration ensures timely notification of downloadable updates and upgrades which are provided to you as a benefit of an active Software Subscription Support agreement. Online registration is required for: • •

Notification of downloadable updates and upgrades. Downloading of the updates and upgrades.

NOTE: Non-downloaded software release distribution may

incur a fee.

Online Registration 1.

Select Support on the Internet from the ScanTools Plus Help menu, or, if desired, go directly to the Scantron Web site at www.scantron.com.

2. Select Support > Product Registration. The product registration page will appear. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to register your product.

16

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 1: Overview Using Online Help

Using Online Help ScanTools Plus online help contains information about each dialog box and other information needed to use the product. To access online help, use one of these methods: •

•

Press F1 from any screen or dialog box to display information about that screen or dialog box. The information about the dialog box may be linked to related topics and information; for example, press F1 while the ScanTools Plus main window is displayed to show online help for this screen. Click Help on the menu bar and select Contents to display the online help system for ScanTools Plus software.

NOTE: Internet Explorer is required for access to the online

help system provided with ScanTools Plus software. Internet access is not required.

User’s Guide

17


Explorer View Help Pane The left side of the online help display is the Explorer View Help. The four tabs of the Explorer View Help window are Contents, Index, Search, and Favorites. These appear to the left of the topic pane so that you never lose your place. Contents Click the Contents tab to browse through topics by category. There are a number of books; each book contains individual help topics. From this dialog box, you can do the following: • • • •

To open a book, click the plus sign ( + ) next to the book or just double-click the book. All individual topics in the book are displayed in a list. To display a topic, click or double-click the topic. To print an individual topic, select the topic, then click the Print button. To print whole sections, click on the desired book in the help contents. Then click on the Print button on the menu bar. You will be given the option of printing just the selected topic, or the heading and all subtopics.

Index Click the Index tab to display a list of index entries. To find a particular topic, either type a word you are looking for or scroll through the list. Search Click the Search tab to search for keywords that may be contained in a help topic. To find topics that contain a word, enter the word in the text box near the top of the Search tab, then click List Topics. A list of topic titles containing the word you typed in will appear in the list box. Double click on a topic title to display a topic. You can also select a topic title and then click the Display button to display a topic. 18

ScanTools Plus


NOTE: If you type in a word that is not a valid keyword, you

will get a message that says, “Help cannot search for that phrase.” Correct this by selecting a valid keyword.

The keywords you searched for will be highlighted if search highlighting is on. You can toggle search highlighting on and off by clicking Options on the menu bar and selecting Search Highlight On/Search Highlight Off. You can also search for multiple keywords. To do this, simply type the words in the text box near the top of the Search tab and click List Topics. The Help System will return a list of topic titles containing all of the keywords you entered. If you type in a word that is not a keyword, the Help System will disregard it and complete the search using the valid keywords you entered. Boolean operators can also be used. Use the words “and,” “or,” and/or “not” with the keywords you enter to better define your searches. Favorites Use the Favorites tab to create a list of your favorite topics. Begin by finding the topic using any of the above three methods (contents, index, or search). Once you find a topic you would like to add to your favorites list, select it, then click the Favorites tab. The topic title will display in the “Current topic:” text box at the bottom of the screen. Click the Add button to add the topic to your favorites list. To display a topic listed in your favorites list, click the Favorites tab, select the topic title, and then click the Display button (or simply double click the topic title). To remove a topic title from the list, select the topic title, and then click the Remove button.

User’s Guide

19


Help Text Pane The right side of the online help display is the Help Text window. It displays the Help text for the currently selected Help topic. You can resize the proportion of the Explorer View Help pane to the Help Text pane by selecting and dragging the line separating the two parts of the help window.

Buttons There are four buttons available at the top of the main Help window. These buttons are described below. Click the Hide and Show buttons to toggle between hiding and showing the Explorer View Help pane. Click the Back button to go to the previous topic you viewed. Click the Print button to print the help topic to your printer. Clicking the Options button yields the following menu selections: • • • • •

20

Hide/Show Tabs: Toggles between hiding and showing the Explorer View Help pane. Back: Takes you to the previous topic you viewed. Forward: After using the Back function, Forward takes you back through the steps you came from. Home: Takes you to the Scantron Customer Support website. Stop: After double clicking a topic title, you can use the Stop button to stop the request for the page. (This is most commonly used when the topic is being delivered via the Internet and there is a delay in the page appearing.) ScanTools Plus


• • • •

Refresh: Refreshes the current topic. Internet Options: Gives you access to your current Windows Internet settings. Print: Prints the current help topic to your printer. Search Highlight Off/On: Toggles between hiding and showing highlights on the word(s) used in the current search.

Links Within the topic window are words that appear in green underline; these are links to other topics. Place your cursor over the green underlined words and the cursor changes to a hand shape. Click the left mouse button to display the new information.

Printing Online Help Topics To print a help topic: From the Contents, Index, or Search tabs, select the desired help topic, then click the Print button on the menu bar. To print a whole section: From the Contents tab, select the desired heading (book), then click the Print button on the menu bar. You will be given the option of printing the selected topic, or printing the heading with all subtopics. Select the latter to print the whole section.

User’s Guide

21

Chapter 1: Overview Upgrading from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software

Upgrading from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software This section provides an overview on upgrading from earlier versions of ScanTools and ScanTools Plus software. NOTE: If you are installing ScanTools for the first time,

proceed to Chapter 2 for instructions on installation and configuration.

Upgrading from ScanTools Plus Software If ScanTools Plus software is already on your system, you must first remove the existing version before installing the new version. NOTE: When installing ScanTools Plus v7.20010, the default

installation path has been changed from “\Pearson NCS” to “\Scantron.” If you choose to install ScanTools Plus to the new default folder, you will need to copy your ScanTools applications (including all profiles, background form images, and user exit programs) to the new folder.

NOTE: ScanTools Plus software version 7.1 or greater and

the utility software do not support Windows 2000. If you are using Windows 2000, do NOT uninstall your previous version of ScanTools and the utility software.

NOTE: ScanTools Plus software version 6.3 or greater and

the utility software do not support Windows NT. If you are using Windows NT, do NOT uninstall your previous version of ScanTools and the utility software.

Refer to “Removing ScanTools Plus Software” and “Installing ScanTools Plus Software” in Chapter 2. IMPORTANT: Before you begin installation, be sure you back

up your existing ScanTools Plus applications, profiles, data files, and clip files.

22

ScanTools Plus


Upgrading from an Earlier Version of ScanTools Software If an earlier version of ScanTools software (ScanTools DOS environment, ScanTools - 16-bit Windows environment, ScanTools II, or Image ScanTools) is already on your system, you have two ways to install the new software version. You can either choose to remove the existing version before installing the new version; or, you can choose to keep the existing version while installing the new version to a different directory. Option 1: Remove the Earlier Version of ScanTools Software 1. Before you begin the installation, be sure you backup your existing ScanTools applications, profiles, data files, background form image files, and clip files. The backup is important because most files are no longer usable with the earlier version of ScanTools after they have been migrated to ScanTools Plus. 2. Remove the existing version of ScanTools software. Refer to “Removing ScanTools Plus Software” in Chapter 2. 3. Install ScanTools Plus software. Refer to “Installing ScanTools Plus Software” in Chapter 2. 4. Migrate your applications, as needed, to ScanTools Plus software. Refer to “Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software” in this chapter. Option 2: Keep the Installation of the Earlier Version of ScanTools Software 1. Before you begin the installation, be sure you backup your existing ScanTools applications, profiles, data files, background form image files, and clip files.

User’s Guide

23


The backup is important because most files are no longer usable with the earlier version of ScanTools after they have been migrated to ScanTools Plus. 2. Install ScanTools Plus software. Refer to “Installing ScanTools Plus Software” in Chapter 2. Be sure to install ScanTools Plus software to a different directory than the one used for the earlier version of ScanTools software you plan to keep. For example: Keep your ScanTools II installation in C:\Program Files\NCS Pearson\ ScanTools II\… Install ScanTools Plus in C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\… 3. Copy the existing applications and associated files that you wish to migrate from the old directory to the new ScanTools Plus directory. Be sure to keep the existing ScanTools applications, profiles, data files, and clip files in the old directory. WARNING: Do NOT point to the existing files in the old

directory from ScanTools Plus when you open the application files to migrate them.

4. Migrate your applications, as needed, to ScanTools Plus. Refer to “Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software” in this chapter. After you have determined your approach, see Chapter 2 to learn about installation and configuration.

24

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 1: Overview Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software

Migrating Applications from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Software This section provides an overview on migrating applications from earlier versions of ScanTools software. Applications, data files, and profiles created and saved in earlier versions of ScanTools software can usually be migrated to ScanTools Plus version 7.2. Migration rules depend on the ScanTools software version you are migrating from. Before proceeding, be sure to check the requirements for your ScanTools software version and make backup copies of each application and profile you plan to migrate. CAUTION: Be sure to back up all applications and profiles

before migrating.

Copy Application Files for Migration If you are migrating to a new version of ScanTools software, we recommend that you prepare as follows: In the version of ScanTools software you are migrating from, use Make Application Disk to copy all files associated with your applications to a specified directory location. Be sure to include background form image files if you are migrating from Image ScanTools. In ScanTools Plus software, use Install Application to copy all files associated with these same applications.

Migrating from Earlier Versions of ScanTools Plus Applications, profiles, and data files created and saved in ScanTools Plus software (versions 6.0 - 7.1) are compatible with ScanTools Plus software version 7.2.

User’s Guide

25


Backward Compatibility Data Files Applications

•

Data files saved or created in 7.1 or greater are no longer backward compatible.

CAUTION: Once saved in the newer format, the applications

remain backward compatible to the same earlier version of ScanTools software, providing the following features are not being used within the ScanTools definition file:

•

•

•

Grayboxes using absolute units of measurement (inches or millimeters) to specify the size and location of evaluate and clip regions. (Cell/TM or Hybrid units of measurement are acceptable.) Software bar codes. If you have selected features (other than what is listed above) or performed operations in ScanTools version 7.0, 7.1, or 7.2 that were not available in the earlier version, they will simply be unavailable. Profiles are backward compatible to ScanTools Plus software (version 6.0 - 7.1) providing new features have not been used.

Migrating from Image ScanTools Applications, profiles, and data files created and saved in Image ScanTools software (version 4.2 or later) are compatible with ScanTools Plus software version 7.2, with one possible exception: Background Form Image File Paths: If you are using background form images in your Image ScanTools application, you may need to update the location of the background form image files:

26

ScanTools Plus


•

If you copy your application, the paths to these files may no longer exist or may have changed. In ScanTools Plus, you must open the application and update the paths, as needed, from the Select Document/Add Images dialog. • If you install your application, ScanTools Plus will search for the background form image files in the directory defined in the Select Document/Add Images dialog. If the files are found, the paths are not updated. If they are not found, it will search the directory where ScanTools Plus.exe is stored. If the files are found there, it will update the directory path(s) in the Select Document/Add Images dialog. We recommend that you open the application, verify the paths, and then update them, as needed, from the Select Document/Add Images dialog. See Installing an Application in online help. Otherwise, no migration actions are required, although you will have the option of specifying the scanner light source via the Set Light Source dialog the first time you open the application. Backward Compatibility

User’s Guide

Data Files

•


Applications

•

CAUTION: Once saved in the newer format, the applications remain backward compatible to the same earlier version of ScanTools software, provided the following features are not being used within the ScanTools definition file: • Grayboxes using absolute units of measurement (inches or millimeters) to specify the size and location of evaluate and clip regions. (Cell/TM or Hybrid units of measurement are acceptable.) • Software bar codes.

27


•

• •

If you have selected functions or performed operations in ScanTools 7.0, 7.1, or 7.2 (or greater) that were not available in the earlier version, they will simply be unavailable. You may need to reset the paths to your background form images, if you use them, in the Select Document/Add Images dialog. Profiles are backward compatible to Image ScanTools software (version 5.0 or later) providing new features have not been used.

Migrating from ScanTools II Applications, profiles, and data files created and saved in ScanTools II software (version 1.0 and later) are completely compatible with ScanTools Plus version 7.2. They require no migration actions although you will have the option of specifying the scanner light source via the Set Light Source dialog the first time you open the application. Backward Compatibility Data Files

•


Applications

•

CAUTION: Once saved in the newer format, the

applications remain backward compatible to the same earlier version of ScanTools software, provided the following features are not being used within the ScanTools definition file: • Grayboxes using absolute units of measurement (inches or millimeters) to specify the size and location of evaluate and clip regions. (Cell/TM or Hybrid units of measurement are acceptable.) •

28

Software bar codes.

ScanTools Plus


•

•

If you have selected features or performed operations in ScanTools version 7.0, 7.1, or 7.2 that were not available in the earlier version, they will simply be unavailable. Profiles are backward compatible to ScanTools II software providing new features have not been used.

Migrating from ScanTools (16-bit, Windows 3.x or later environment) You can use applications, profiles, and data files that were created in ScanTools (16-bit, Windows 3.x or later environment) version 1.2 or later. When you open the application or an associated profile from this earlier version, the Application Migration Options dialog box will be displayed. You must decide whether or not to save it in the newer 32-bit ScanTools format. Once saved in the newer format, the file cannot be used in ScanTools software (16-bit Windows environment). See online help for information about how Light Source, Read Parameters, Mark Threshold, and Discrimination Margin settings are affected in this migration. Backward Compatibility There is no backward compatibility. Applications and profiles saved with ScanTools Plus version 7.1 or greater cannot be used in previous versions of ScanTools (16-bit Windows environment). NOTE: Sample Application 701 was created in the 16-bit,

Windows version of ScanTools to demonstrate application migration.

Migrating from ScanTools - DOS environment You can use applications, profiles, and data files that were created in ScanTools (DOS environment) software version 2.5b or later. When you open the application or an associated profile from this earlier version, the Application Migration Options dialog box will be User’s Guide

29


displayed. You must decide whether or not to save it in the newer ScanTools format. Once saved in the newer format, the file cannot be used in ScanTools software (DOS or 16-bit Windows environments). See online help for information about how Light Source, Read Parameters, Mark Threshold, and Discrimination Margin settings are affected in this migration. Backward Compatibility There is no backward compatibility. Applications and profiles saved with ScanTools Plus version 7.1 cannot be used in ScanTools (DOS or 16-bit Windows environments).

iNAME Image Archiving Migration Before using iNAME scan-time image archiving with an application created in an earlier version of ScanTools software (DOS or 16-bit Windows), the application must be saved (migrated) in ScanTools Plus format. If you are running an existing ScanTools application with iNAME image archiving, we recommend you update your iNAME implementation to take advantage of the ease of operation provided by the new, integrated interface. See online help for information about how to do this.

iNAME Merge Migration Existing applications using the iNAME Merge functionality will run the same as in your previous version of ScanTools software. However, you may need to update the location of the background form image files. The paths to these files are stored in the application, so if the directory no longer exists or you move the application to a different directory when you migrate to ScanTools Plus, you must open the application and then update the paths from the Select Document/Add Images dialog. iNAME image archiving, including the iNAME Merge function, is integrated with ScanTools Plus software. If 30

ScanTools Plus


you are running an existing iNAME image archiving application, we recommend you update your iNAME implementation to take advantage of the ease of operation provided by the integrated interface.

Image Enable Disable Utility Migration See online help for information about how the Image Enable Disable Utility affects migration.

RealTime OCR Migration See RealTime Character Recognition documentation for information about continuing to use RealTime OCR™ and about migrating to RealTime Character Recognition.

User Exit Migration See online help for information about how User Exits are affected by migration. If you are using an earlier version of ScanTools software with User Exits and you want to migrate to the current version of ScanTools, you may have some rework to perform. The table below provides a general description of what you will have to do for this migration from each of the earlier versions of ScanTools. Current ScanTools Version

Version Level User Exit Migration Route

ScanTools (DOS environment)

All versions

Rewrite all User Exits.

ScanTools (16-bit, Windows environment

All versions

Port User Exits from 16-bit to 32-bit and recompile.

ScanTools II

1.0 - 1.2

Port to the new shell and recompile is recommended. May not be required, depending on User Exit calls being used. See the Rebuilding User Exits topic in online help for additional details.

ScanTools II

1.3

No changes required.

User’s Guide

31


Current ScanTools Version

Version Level User Exit Migration Route

Image ScanTools

1.0 - 4.2

Port to the new shell and recompile is required. See the Rebuilding User Exits topic in online help for additional details.

Image ScanTools

5.0 - 5.2


ScanTools Plus

All versions


32

ScanTools Plus

In this chapter: Before You Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 34 Installing ScanTools Plus Software. . . . . . . . . . . page 35 Removing (Uninstalling) ScanTools Plus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49 ScanTools Plus Configuration Settings . . . . . . . page 52

2

Chapter 2: Installation and Configuration This chapter describes how to install, remove, and configure ScanTools Plus software. If you experience any problems during the installation, do the following: 1. Record the sequence of steps leading to the problem. 2. Record all error messages encountered. 3. Have your 9-digit software Serial Number available. It is printed on the CD sleeve and back cover of this manual. 4. Be available at the scanning system and call Scantron Customer Support at 1-800-338-5544. An operator will ask you to describe your problem and then will connect you to a Scantron Customer Support analyst. If the analyst is unavailable, he or she will call you back, normally within one hour. NOTE: The RealTime Character Recognition optional

component must be installed separately.

User’s Guide

33

Chapter 2: Installation and Configuration Before You Install

Before You Install Before you install, make sure your system meets the requirements listed earlier in System Requirements, including any Service Packs and hotfixes. If you attempt to install ScanTools Plus software on an unsupported operating system, you receive an error message and are unable to install. Also, review the upgrading information discussed in Chapter 1. This installation procedure applies to all operating systems. Where appropriate, the specific operating system is named. NOTE: You must have Administrator rights to INSTALL or REMOVE ScanTools Plus software. Before proceeding, note the following: • Backup. If upgrading, be sure you back up your existing ScanTools applications, profiles, and data files before you begin the installation. • Exit all other application programs before installing ScanTools Plus software. • If ScanTools Plus software is already installed on your system (the same version or a previous version), you must first remove the existing version. Refer to the Remove procedures later in this section. If you do not remove it, you will be prompted to do so when you attempt to install. • Auto-Start. Make sure that the Auto-Start feature of your CD-ROM drive is enabled, or run setup.exe on the CD. • License Key. You will be entering a special 14-character, alphanumeric License Key to install ScanTools Plus software. The License Key is used for installation and the 9-digit Serial Number is used when you call Scantron Customer Support. Do NOT use the Serial Number during the installation procedure. A label containing the License Key, Serial Number, and product name is displayed on the CD sleeve and the back cover of this manual. The Serial Number also is displayed in the About Box of the Help menu. To distinguish the numeral zero (0) from the letter O, the numeral zero will have a dot printed in the middle.

34

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 2: Installation and Configuration Installing ScanTools Plus Software

Installing ScanTools Plus Software 1.

User’s Guide

Insert the ScanTools Plus software CD into the CDROM drive. The software installation will start automatically. Follow the on-screen installation directions. The InstallShield Wizard dialog box is displayed immediately followed by the Welcome screen:

35


Click Next >.

36

ScanTools Plus


2. The License Agreement dialog box is displayed.

To continue installing, you must select “I accept the terms of the license agreement”. Use the scroll bar to read the entire text of the license agreement, and/or use the Print button to print a copy of it. Click Next >.

User’s Guide

37


3. The Customer Information dialog box is displayed.

Enter your User Name, Company Name, and License Key in the appropriate text boxes. This information is required for software installation. NOTE: License Key: DO NOT ENTER THE 9-DIGIT

SERIAL NUMBER. Enter the 14-character, alphanumeric License Key located on the CD sleeve and the back cover of this manual. To help you distinguish the numeral zero (0) from the letter O, the numeral zero will have a dot printed in the middle.

Click Next >.

38

ScanTools Plus


4. The Registration Confirmation screen is displayed.

Check your registration information again. If necessary, click No to return to the previous screen for re-entering any incorrect data. Click Yes to continue.

User’s Guide

39


5. The Select Components dialog box is displayed.

The software components differ according to the variant of ScanTools Plus software you purchased. The variant description is displayed at the top of this screen; Scan Only has the fewest choices, Application Development has more choices, Application Development with Scoring has the most choices. If needed, use the scroll bar on the right side to view all components available for installation. Select any optional components you need by checking the box to the left of its name. Do not uncheck the Scanning Module; it is required. You can also remove one or more of the optional components by clicking on a component that is already checked.

40

ScanTools Plus


NOTE: The optional Download Plus utility software

component is only used with OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 and OpScan scanners equipped with Download firmware. See the Download Utility User's Guide that comes with these scanners for more information.

6. The Destination Folder indicates the default path where the ScanTools Plus program will reside. If you want a different destination folder for the program files, click Browse to display the Choose Folder dialog box.

Enter the new path in the Path text box (default is currently displayed) or click the desired folder in the “Directories” window. Click OK to return to the previous Select Components dialog box. 7. Space Required and Space Available are displayed below the Destination Folder indicating how much User’s Guide

41


disk space is required and how much is available. Click the Disk Space button to see how much space is available on a different drive. The Available Disk Space dialog box is displayed.

Select a different Drive and the Space Available and Space Required fields are automatically updated. Click OK to return to the Select Components dialog box. The drive that was last selected in the Available Disk Space dialog box is used in the Select Components dialog box. When the component list and the Destination Folder on the Select Components dialog box are correct, click Next >.

42

ScanTools Plus


8. If you chose to install one or more of the User Exit Shell Module options, the Select Directory dialog is displayed for each, in turn.

Navigate to the User Exit Wizard directory for each module; this should be the directory where Microsoft C++ Visual Studio and .NET will expect to find their wizards, normally: • • • User’s Guide

Microsoft Visual Studio\Msdevxx\bin\Ide where xx is the Visual Studio software version Microsoft Visual Studio .NET xxxx\Vc7 where xxxx is the .NET software version Microsoft Visual Studio 8\VC 43


Click OK. 9. The Add Desktop and Quick Launch Icons dialog box is displayed.

Select which shortcuts you want installed along with the ScanTools Plus software. You may select all items. Desktop installs a program icon on the Windows desktop; Quick Launch installs a program icon on the Quick Launch toolbar of the Windows taskbar. Click Next >.

44

ScanTools Plus


10. The Select Program Folder is displayed.

Scantron is the default folder name. If you will be working from a different program folder, type the program folder name in the text box or highlight a folder name in the Existing Folders window. Click Next >.

User’s Guide

45


11. The setup program will begin copying files. The Setup Status progress screen is displayed during the installation.

46

ScanTools Plus


12. After all program files are installed, the Registration information dialog box is displayed.

You should register online after installation. Online registration is required for timely notification of downloadable updates and upgrades, and to perform the download operation. For details, see “Registering the Software” on page 16. Click OK.

User’s Guide

47


13. The InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box for ScanTools Plus is displayed.

Select the actions you want to occur immediately after installation. “Launch ScanTools Plus” and “Yes, I want to view the ReadMe file now” are both selected by default. You can view it at any time using the Windows Start | Programs menu. It is available under the ScanTools Plus program. We recommend you read the file before you begin using the software. Click Finish to complete the installation process.

48

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 2: Installation and Configuration Removing (Uninstalling) ScanTools Plus Software

Removing (Uninstalling) ScanTools Plus Software To remove ScanTools Plus software from your system, use the steps listed below. User created items such as data files, profiles, applications, and directories will not be deleted. NOTE: The RealTime Character Recognition optional

component must be removed separately.

The illustrations below are intended to represent the various steps. The precise look of your operating system may appear slightly different. 1.

To begin the uninstall process, select the appropriate command from the following:

•

(Windows XP) click Start | Control Panel | Add or Remove Programs (Windows Vista) click Start | Control Panel | Programs and Features

•

User’s Guide

49


2. The Add/Remove Programs window is displayed for Windows XP systems.

The Programs and Features window is displayed for Windows Vista systems.

Select ScanTools Plus from the program list, then click the Remove (Windows XP) or the Uninstall (Windows Vista) button. 50

ScanTools Plus


3. A dialog box stating that ScanTools Plus is preparing the InstallShield Wizard is displayed followed by the ScanTools Plus Setup confirmation screen.

Click Yes. 4. The Setup Status screen is displayed, followed by the Uninstall Complete screen.

Click Finish. 5. The Add/Remove Program (Windows XP) or Programs and Features (Windows Vista) window is displayed. Verify that the ScanTools Plus program has been removed and then close the window.

User’s Guide

51

Chapter 2: Installation and Configuration ScanTools Plus Configuration Settings

ScanTools Plus Configuration Settings Before you can start scanning documents, you need to specify the following in ScanTools Plus software: the scanner configuration, the directory paths to the applications, profiles, data files, and what actions will require confirmation. NOTE: Do NOT attempt to run any of the ScanTools Plus

functions until you have completed the following setup procedures:

1.

Make sure the scanner is properly connected to the personal computer.

2. Write down the following information for future reference: • • •

The scanner model. Whether or not the scanner has a transport printer, select stacker, or a hardware bar code reader installed. For OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 and OpScan scanners using an RS-232 connection, note the serial communication information (i.e., COM port on the PC, baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity). This information is not needed for the OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, OpScan 10/15/21, iNSIGHT 20, iNSIGHT 30, or OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 with Imaging scanners. EZData scanners are auto-detected and do not require scanner configuration.

3. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar and choose Programs. 4. Select the Scantron > ScanTools Plus entry. The ScanTools Plus main window is displayed.

52

ScanTools Plus


In the following sample main window, the Configure menu is activated. You will be using the Scanner Configuration, Paths, and Confirmations options on this menu.

Scanner Configuration 1.

From the Configure menu, click Scanner Configuration. The Scanner Configuration dialog box is displayed. This dialog box displays differently depending on which scanner model is selected (see below). NOTE: The dialog boxes displayed below are examples

only. For example, the Scanner Model in the dialog box for OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, and OpScan 10/15/21 scanners shows a 5000i. The options will be the same for the OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150 and OpScan 10/15/21 scanners.

User’s Guide

53


OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, and OpScan 10/15/21 Scanners

54

ScanTools Plus


iNSIGHT 20 and iNSIGHT 30 Scanners

User’s Guide

55


OpScan iNSIGHT 2 with Imaging Scanners

56

ScanTools Plus


OpScan iNSIGHT 4 with Imaging Scanners

User’s Guide

57


OpScan 2/3/5/6/7/8/9010/9020 and OpScan iNSIGHT 2 (OMR only) Scanners

58

ScanTools Plus


OpScan 4/4U/iNSIGHT 4 (OMR only) Scanners

User’s Guide

59


EZData Scanners

2. For OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, and OpScan 10/15/21 scanners, select any optional scanner configuration information. 3. For other scanners, click Auto Configure to automatically determine the Communications parameters and then change individual parameters (manually) if required. You should still double-check the items for Transport Printer, Select Stacker, and Write Operations Log, as Auto Configure does not handle these. 4. For ScanTools Plus software to keep a log of scanner operations, select the Write Operations Log check box. The operations log is written to operate.log, an ASCII file located in the Data Files directory at the end of each batch scanned. The data files directory is defined in the Paths dialog box shown below; by default, this is in the C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\Data Files

60

ScanTools Plus


directory. You can view the log at any time with a text editor. 5. Click OK.

Paths for Applications, Profiles, and Data Files 1.

From the Configure menu, select Paths. The Paths dialog box is displayed.

2. This dialog box points to the directories where your ScanTools applications, profiles, data files, and index files for image archiving are stored. Initially after installation, the paths displayed are based on the installation location. Use the Browse button if you need to navigate to a different location where the files reside.

User’s Guide

61


Confirmations From the Configure menu, select Confirmations. The Confirmations dialog box is displayed.

NOTE: The Confirmations dialog box can be accessed

from the Configure menu of the ScanTools Plus main window or the Options menu of the Application Module.

Confirmations are used when a ScanTools Plus action is initiated. ScanTools Plus software presents a message box verifying that the user really wants to perform the action. Use this dialog box to select the items for which you want a verification dialog box to be displayed. This is a safety feature to help prevent accidental erasure or overwriting of files. See online help for more detailed information about the items in this dialog box.

62

ScanTools Plus

In this chapter: Task Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts of an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a ScanTools Plus Application . . . . . . . Making an Application Disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing an Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 64 page 67 page 81 page 90 page 93 page 95

3

Chapter 3: Modify/Create an Application This chapter describes how to modify or create a ScanTools Plus application using the ScanTools Plus Application Module.

User’s Guide

63

Chapter 3: Modify/Create an Application Task Summary

Task Summary This section briefly describes how to modify an existing ScanTools Plus application and how to create a new ScanTools Plus application. Subsequent sections in this chapter provide additional details.

Modifying an Existing Application 1.

From the ScanTools Plus Application menu, choose Select and then select the application you want to modify.

2. From the Application menu, select Open. 3. Make required modifications to the application. 4. From the Application menu, select Settings. These settings apply to all documents in the application. Ensure that the Release for scanning option is checked (enabled). The remaining settings (options) are mostly for image scanners and apply to all documents in the application. 5. Save the ScanTools Plus application, using Save or Save As (a different name). 6. Exit the ScanTools Plus Application Module window.

Creating a New Application 1.

Select New from the ScanTools Plus application menu.

2. From the Application menu, select Settings. These settings apply to all documents in the application. Most settings are for image scanners and apply to all documents in the application. 3. Define the new document: • 64

Select New from the Document menu. ScanTools Plus


• •

Name the new document. If you have a .tif file of the background form image, add it to the document using the Add All Images button; timing marks and form ID marks will be automatically defined from the background image. If you do not have the background .tif file, scan the sample sheets to define the timing marks and form ID marks; if you use an image scanner, a grayscale image of the sheet is also displayed and saved. If no scanner is attached, manually enter the number of timing marks and the form ID mark locations. NOTE: Documents that are scanned by EZData scanners will also register bias bar values in addition to Form ID Marks and Timing Marks. NOTE: If you have a background .tif file that was not

supplied by the form vendor, it may be suitable for application definition, but might not be suitable for image archiving or post-scan editing.

•

Add Skew Mark locations if the document has skew marks printed on it. • Add Image Scanner Options if required. • Click OK. NOTE: Importing a document is another way of creating an application. See the details of importing later in this chapter. 4. Create a new output format. 5. Create output field(s). 6. Define grids and fields. NOTE: If you are scoring, refer to the “Modify or Create

a Score Profile” section before completing the Document Record definition.

User’s Guide

65


7. Select Options from the Options menu to define other parameters associated with the application. 8. Ensure that the Release for scanning option is checked (enabled) in Application Settings. 9. Save the ScanTools Plus application (provide application title and unique 3-digit number). To avoid unexpected loss of input, we recommend that you save your application at various times during the application creation process. 10. Close the ScanTools Plus Application Module window. NOTE: If an application is modified, all profiles

associated with that application must be deleted and new profiles developed.

66

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 3: Modify/Create an Application Parts of an Application

Parts of an Application A ScanTools Plus application is a set of rules that governs how your computer collects data from your scanner and how it stores this information on your disk. The Application Module enables you to create or modify applications. Each ScanTools Plus application contains one or more document definitions and one or more output formats. • • • •

User’s Guide

A document definition describes the location of data items on each form in the document. An output format defines the arrangement of a document's data items when they are written to a data file. A record format specifies how fields and character constants are arranged as part of a record. A document sequence definition describes the order in which the documents can be scanned.

67


Document Definition A document is one or more sheets that together contain the data for one document record. A document with more than one sheet is called a booklet.

Sheet 4

A Document Can Be Sheet 3 Sheet 2 Sheet 1

or A Booklet

A Sheet

(Made up of many sheets)

Features of a Form Forms must be printed to precise tolerances so that they are reliable for holding data. The ScanFlex option allows for forms printed with less tight printing tolerances to be scanned successfully on image scanners. Forms scanned by Scantron scanners have the following features: •

•

68

Timing Marks: These are a regular series of short black bars down the long edge of a form. They tell the scanner where to find data on the form. Collectively, they are called the timing track. Form ID Marks: These black squares typically align with the first timing mark on the form. The number and position of the Form ID Marks uniquely identify each form that is used in a document.

ScanTools Plus


• • • •

•

•

User’s Guide

Skew Marks: These are small black ovals printed on a sheet that provide additional skew detection to ScanTools Plus software. Skew marks are optional. Leading Edge: The edge of the sheet that enters the scanner first. Form ID Marks are normally placed here. Guide Edge: The edge of an OMR form that aligns with the guide rail of the scanner. The timing track always corresponds with the guide edge. Response positions: These are small ovals, circles, or rectangles printed in color on the form; they indicate where the user should mark the sheet. The response positions line up in rows that align with the timing marks. Clip Region (Image scanners only): The area of a form defined for image clipping. Image clips are used with editing and archiving, gray boxes, software bar codes, and with the optional RealTime Character Recognition component. Bias Bar (EZData scanners only): The EZData scanner requires that a bias bar be defined for every sheet of every form. A bias bar is a row of 12 black cells and is used at scanning time to make certain the scanner read head is functioning properly before scanning forms. The bias bar is printed on each side of the forms used by the EZData scanner. Enter the number that corresponds to the location of the timing mark on which the bias bar is printed. If you use the Scan button to define the EZData form, the timing mark number is automatically inserted. Valid values are 1 through the highest timing mark number on the form. Zero (0) is an invalid number for the EZData scanner.

69


NOTE: Each of these features (except for clip region) is

shown in the following diagram:

Form IDs

Leading Edge

Bias Bar (for EZData Scanners)

Guide Edge

Timing Marks IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

Grid

Response String or Characters

Output Format Definition When a document is scanned, the data (the document record) is written to the data file that you specify. Each document record is stored as a single ASCII character string terminated by a carriage return and linefeed.

70

ScanTools Plus


•

The first 40 positions in the string are the NCS Header data generated automatically by ScanTools Plus software to uniquely identify each document record. Refer to online help for more information on the NCS Header. • The remaining characters comprise the data that was scanned from the document. The data is arranged in the order you specify when creating the document definition. NOTE: If you selected “Sample Applications and Files” during installation, the file 801 sample.dat is installed in the Data Files directory under the directory where ScanTools Plus software is installed (the default is C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\Data Files). You may view it by selecting the 801 Application and the 801 sample.dat, then View from the Data File menu in the ScanTools Plus main window. (The file may also be viewed using any standard text editor.)

Tools ScanTools Plus software provides a set of tools that you use to create the grids and other data that populate a record format (see Tutorials, Appendices A and B). These tools are arranged as buttons in the upper left corner of the application module window. See the list of tools and associated tool buttons below:

OMR Tool. Defines how response marks on a sheet are to be interpreted as data. Do this by creating or selecting a grid, then setting the characteristics of the grid. By default, an image clip region is defined that is identical to the grid User’s Guide

71


location; but, you may change the size and shape of the clip region using Ctrl + drag. There is a Clip Attributes button to access the Clip Attributes dialog for defining archive information and characteristics of the image clip associated with a grid. The image definitions are only used when scanning with an image scanner. Bar Code Tool. ScanTools Plus software supports both hardware and software bar code reading systems:

72

•

Hardware bar codes are supported for both OMR and image scanners through an optional external bar code reader attached to the scanner. The bar codes on a document must all be in a vertical orientation, on the top side of the scanned sheet, and located the same distance from the guide edge. Up to six bar codes can be read per sheet. Use the Bar Code tool to define the relative position and number of characters in the bar code. If you are scanning with an image scanner, you can optionally “draw” a hardware bar code clip region in the grid definition area and access the Clip Attributes dialog to define archive information and the characteristics of the image clip associated with the bar code.

•

Software bar codes are supported for image scanners through included bar code software. The bar codes on a document may be in a vertical or horizontal orientation, on the top or bottom side of the scanned sheet, and located almost anywhere. The number of bar codes per sheet is primarily limited by space. Use the Bar Code tool to define the number of characters in the bar code, the bar code orientation, degrees of allowed skew, and bar code type. Software bar codes are defined as image clips in your application and you can access the Clip Attributes dialog to define archive information and the characteristics of the image clip associated with the bar code.

ScanTools Plus


Codabar, Code 128, Code 25, Code 39, and UPC/EAN bar code types are supported by both hardware and software bar code reading systems. Additionally, PDF417 bar code type is supported by software bar code. Hardware bar code decodes these types automatically. Software bar code can be set to decode these types automatically or you can set it to look for just the specific types you expect. Graybox Tool. For image scanners only, a graybox defines a region of the form to be evaluated for the presence of data (e.g., a written comment, hand printed text, or machine printed text). If the mark value of a Graybox region exceeds the threshold you define, the region is considered to contain data and is clipped. The image clip is used for post-scan editing or archiving or, if the optional RealTime Character Recognition component is installed, for text recognition. •

By default, the image clip region is identical to the data evaluate region. If desired, the size and shape of the clip region can be changed so that each is different. You can use Ctrl+Drag in the Application Module grid definition area to extend the clip area or you can select the Grid Measurement button to access the Grid Measurement dialog where you can define each region. • The Clip Attributes button is used to access the Clip Attributes dialog where you can define archive information and characteristics of the image clip associated with the graybox. • The Resolution group box is available for you to select Standard Graybox if you are clipping for editing or archiving or ICR/OCR Graybox if you are clipping for the optional RealTime Character Recognition. If installed, the RealTime Character Recognition engine returns the highest confidence character according to the ICR/OCR Parameters defined. The post-scan editor, using a graybox edit for ICR/OCR, will display the

User’s Guide

73


clipped image and the highest confidence character, an asterisk, or a space, as defined in the edit profile. •

The ICR/OCR Parameters button is available to access the Print Type, Output, and Content dialogs for defining the physical aspects of the text expected in the ICR/OCR graybox, if the optional RealTime Character Recognition component is installed. • The Test Recognition button is available to access the Recognition Results dialog where you can view character recognition results of a sample scanned sheet containing hand print or machine print characters. This is available if the optional component RealTime Character Recognition component is installed, and the graybox Resolution selected is ICR/ OCR Graybox, and you are using an image scanner. Translate Tool. The Translate Tool creates a custom grid type and defines what the output characters are for each response position in the grid. You can import translate tables from a different application into the currently open application. Every translate table name appears as a Type in the OMR tool in all documents in the application. Literal Tool. The Literal tool defines a character or string of characters that is always written to every document record. It is also used to define selected parts of the NCS Header, such as the serial number, scan data, or the batch number, to be included in your data file. This tool does not provide an image clip for image scanners. Image Clips for OMR Grids, Bar Codes, and Grayboxes When used with image scanners, ScanTools Plus software is a system based on the clipping of images; that is, rather than saving all pixels from every piece of paper passed through the scanner, ScanTools Plus software saves only those portions of the image that are needed later, either for Key From Image (KFI), edit correction, archiving, bar code, or ICR/OCR (with the RealTime Character Recognition optional component). ScanTools Plus software supports a clip region for each OMR grid, bar 74

ScanTools Plus


code, or graybox (by default, software bar code and graybox clip regions match their evaluate regions). This is the area that will be clipped; on edit failure, for archiving, or for ICR/OCR resolution. By default, clip regions match their evaluate regions. To redefine the clip region to be different from the evaluate region, drag the cursor over the area you want defined while pressing the Ctrl key. For grayboxes and bar codes, you can also use the Grid Measurement dialog to define or modify each region. Select the Grid Measurement dialog from either the Graybox Tool dialog or the Bar Code Tool dialog to define the unit of measurement and exact location of the graybox or bar code clip and evaluate regions. For more information on grid measurement, see online help. NOTE: For OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging)

Scanner Users: As absolute Units of Measurement (.001 in and .01 mm) is an advanced feature of ScanTools Plus software, utilizing the full capabilities of OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging) scanners, you should ensure that your scanner includes the advanced features in scanner Manufacturing Level ML013 or greater. To verify your scanner Manufacturing Level, look at the serial number label on the back of the scanner and read the “ML” number:

User’s Guide

75


If the ML number is less than ML013, call Scantron Customer Support at 800-338-5544 to arrange to have your scanner enhanced to this Manufacturing Level. For International users, contact your local sales agent. Using the Clip Attributes dialog on the associated tool, you may select archiving of the individual image clip for each grid, bar code, or graybox as part of the ScanTools Plus application definition. For more information on archiving images, see Chapter 8. If you are using an image scanner, you can use the software bar code section of the Bar Code tool dialog to define decoding characteristics for bar codes within the bar code clip. In addition, you can use Test Bar Code to test bar code decoding. If the full version of the RealTime Character Recognition optional component is installed, you may use the ICR/ OCR Parameters dialog on the Graybox tool to define character recognition characteristics for text within the graybox. In addition, if you are using an image scanner, you can use Test Recognition to perform character recognition testing. For more information on ScanTools Plus application definition for RealTime Character Recognition, see the separate User’s Guide and online help provided with the optional component. Different OMR Grid Types The ScanTools Plus Application Module provides the grid response position strings for the grid types that are listed below. All of these grid types are also displayed on the OMR tool dialog box. •

76

Alphabetic, no space: This grid type contains no space and the characters A-Z. It is provided with the translate tool. Only one mark in an alphabetic string is allowed.

ScanTools Plus


•

Alphanumeric: The valid alphanumeric characters are a blank space, A - Z, 0 - 9, and the following special characters. [.<(+\&!$*);^-/,%_>?:#@'=" Only one mark in an alphanumeric string is allowed. This grid type is provided with the translate tool.

User’s Guide

•

Binary: Each position in the string represents a power of two. The first bubble represents one, the second bubble two, the third bubble four, and so on. Multiple marks are allowed. The values of all the marked bubbles are added together to produce the value of the grid. For example, marking the first (1), third (4), and fifth (16) bubbles will produce the following grid value (1 + 4 + 16 = 21). NOTE: Binary grids CANNOT have preslug resolution defined as an attribute in the Output field Entry. Also, you CANNOT define a preslug edit in an edit profile for this grid type.

•

BCD (binary-coded decimal): A five-position string (1248P) similar to binary, except that only the decimal numbers 0 through 9 can be represented by the response position string (10 through 15 cause the character “*” to be written to the document record). The fifth position is a parity bit. ScanTools Plus software uses odd parity. If the parity bit is incorrect, a “*” character is written to the document record. Multiple marks are allowed in each response position. If only four positions (1248) are used, the parity bit is not present and no parity checks will be made. NOTE: Binary-coded decimal grids CANNOT have preslug resolution defined as an attribute in the Output Field Entry. Also, you CANNOT define a preslug edit in an edit profile for this grid type.

77


•

Binary (Scoring): This grid type allows for multiple correct answers during test scoring. (ScanTools Plus Score Module does not support multiple correct marks.) NOTE: Binary scoring grids CANNOT have preslug resolution defined as an attribute in the Output Field Entry. Also, you CANNOT define a preslug edit in an edit profile for this grid type.

•

Binary with Parity: Each position in the string represents the number 0 or 1. The highest-order position represents a parity bit. ScanTools Plus software uses odd parity. If the parity bit is incorrect, a “*” character is written to the document record. If no bubble is marked in a response position string, a zero (0) is written in the data record. Multiple marks are allowed in each response position. NOTE: Binary with parity grids CANNOT have preslug resolution defined as an attribute in the Output field Entry. Also, you CANNOT define a preslug edit in an edit profile for this grid type.

•

Litho-code: Unique serial numbers applied when the form was printed. The coding scheme is the same as binary, except that no parity bit is provided for. Your Scantron Print Services representative can discuss the uses of litho-codes with you. NOTE: Litho-code grids CANNOT have preslug resolution defined as an attribute in the Output field Entry. Also, you CANNOT define a preslug edit in an edit profile for this grid type.

•

Numeric: The decimal numbers 0 through 9. Only one mark is allowed in each response position. This type is provided with the translate tool. One digit response: The decimal numbers 1 through 9. Only one mark is allowed in each response position. This type is provided with the translate tool. In order to score, test questions must be defined as either a one- or two-digit response.

•

78

ScanTools Plus


•

•

Two digit response: The decimal characters 01 through 99 represented as a single response position string. Only one mark is allowed in each response position. This type is provided with the translate tool. In order to score, test questions must be defined as either a one- or two-digit response. Translate: Each response position is translated to one or more output characters defined in the translate table. You can create your own translate tables in addition to those provided by ScanTools Plus software. You can also import translate tables from a different application into the currently open application. The following standard translate types are provided with the translate tool: • Alphabetic, no space • Alphanumeric • Numeric • One-digit response • Two-digit response

Application Options The Options item on the ScanTools Plus Application Module window menu bar enables you to select other parameters associated with a ScanTools Plus application:

User’s Guide

•

Sequence defines what document sequences are acceptable when scanning a multi-document application. NOTE: Sequence is active only when more than one document is defined in the application.

•

Confirmations enable you to define which actions in ScanTools Plus software will generate a confirmation dialog box.

79


•

•

•

80

Read Controls define the level of control the ScanTools Plus application user has in adjusting the threshold and discrimination settings from ScanTools Plus software. Form ID Matching provides an enhanced check for documents in the same application that have different widths but have identical Form ID Marks for the area they have in common. iNAME Configuration provides the parameters used for scan-time image archiving, including which images to archive, the destination directories for the image files, single or multi-image files created, if user exits are also being used, index file format, defining the actual index entries that will be written to the index file, and whether or not to run iNAME Merge after scanning.

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 3: Modify/Create an Application Creating a ScanTools Plus Application

Creating a ScanTools Plus Application This section describes in detail the steps for creating a new ScanTools Plus application or a ScanTools Plus application by modifying an existing one. For more specific details, refer to Appendices A and B.

Start ScanTools Plus Application Definition To start ScanTools Plus Application Definition select Application from the ScanTools Plus main window menu bar; then click New. The ScanTools Plus Application Module window is displayed. NOTE: The window below is an example only.

User’s Guide

81


Open an Existing ScanTools Plus Application for Modification To modify an existing ScanTools Plus application, do the following: 1.

In the ScanTools Plus Main dialog box, select the application you want to modify from the Application drop-down list and then select Application from the menu bar and click Open. Or; Select Application from the menu bar and click Open.

2. In the Open Application dialog box, select the application you want to modify, then select the Title or Number from the drop-down list, and then click OK.

Select Application Settings From the Application selection on the menu bar, select Settings. The Application Settings dialog box is displayed. The settings in this dialog are primarily used by image scanners. The values defined in this dialog are used by all documents in the application. Application Settings include the following items, all are explained in detail in online help. • • • •

82

Release for Scanning - required for scanning from the main screen. Inverted Transport Printing - if the currently configured scanner does not have a printer installed, this appears in red. User Exit File Name, if used Image Settings - All of the remaining settings are used by image scanners only. If you are using an OMR scanner you can still select image settings if you plan ScanTools Plus


to use an image scanner at some time. The settings will be ignored for the OMR scanner during scanning (not during application definition). • OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150 and 5000i scanners only settings: • Read Mode - resolution vs. speed • Sheet Length for Thickness Measurement used to ensure detected double sheets do not produce thickness errors due to thicker areas (e.g., bar codes) on the form.

Select or Create a Document To select an existing document, do the following: 1.

Select Document from the ScanTools Application Module window menu bar and click Select. The Select Document dialog box is displayed.

2. Click the Title drop-down list to select the document you want. 3. Click OK. To create a new document, do the following: 1.

Select Document from the menu bar and click New. The New Document dialog box is displayed.

2. Type the document name in the Title field. 3. If you have a .tif file of the background form image, add it to the document with the Add All Images or Add Image button. Timing marks and form ID mark locations are automatically defined from the background image, the information is displayed in the lower half of the dialog box. 4. If you do not have the background .tif file, load your scanner with a sample document. If the document has User’s Guide

83


more than one sheet, make sure the sheets are in the correct order. Click the Scan All button. When the sample document has completed scanning, information about the timing marks and the form ID marks of each sheet is displayed in the lower half of the dialog box. 5. If no scanner is attached, manually enter the number of timing marks and the form ID mark locations. 6. If skew marks are printed on the document, they must be defined manually. Skew marks are not automatically defined by scanning a sheet and/or adding a background .tif file. Use Skew Mark Locations, Add button to display the Add Skew Mark dialog where you enter location information for each skew mark on each side of the sheet. 7. Click OK.

Import a Document WARNING: Whenever you modify an application in

ScanTools Plus software, any edit, score, or conversion profiles associated with that application are invalidated. This includes importing documents into an application. You must re-create the profiles.

!

You can import a document in the following three ways: •

84

Import a document created in Scantron DesignExpert™ software. • First export the document from Scantron DesignExpert software; this creates a ScanTools Plus application file with an .SDS (ScanTools Document System) extension. Use this .SDS file as the application containing the document you wish to import. • Second, if you are using Scantron DesignExpert sofware with the optional PrintFlex module, export the background form image files. This ScanTools Plus


creates a file with .TIF extension for each sheet side. Use this .TIF file as the background form image during application definition, and for editing and archiving. NOTE: Image information defined in Scantron DesignExpert software cannot be imported into ScanTools Plus. •

Import a document from one application into another application. • Import a document within the same application (modify Form IDs and create a similar document). To do this, select the same application that is now open. To import a document, do the following: 1.

In the Application Module, open the application you want to import the document into.

2. From the Document menu, select Import ScanTools Document. The Select Application File dialog box is displayed. 3. Select the application containing the document you want to import and click OK. The Select Document to Import dialog box is displayed. NOTE: Only applications with the .SDS extension can

be imported.

4. Select the Title of the Document to Import and the Document Number in the Destination Application; then, click OK. 5. During the import operation, Document Titles, Record Formats, and Translate Tables are checked for duplication. When a duplicate item is found, a dialog box is displayed explaining the problem and giving you options to correct it.

User’s Guide

85


6. After importing a document, save the application in one of two ways: 1) use the Save function on the Application menu to save it to the same application name and number, or 2) use the Save As function to save it to a different application name and number. 7. If you have exported background form image files from the optional Scantron DesignExpert PrintFlex module, you can add them to your document. Use the Add All Images or Add Image button in the Select Document or New Document dialog. See online help for full details about importing a document.

Select or Create an Output Format A document definition must be associated with an output format. When you select a document, the output format is automatically selected. To select and view an existing Output Format click Select from the Output menu bar item. NOTE: If you select a different output format from the one

that was associated with the document, the ScanTools Plus Application Module window displays a “Delete all grids for the current document and apply the new output format?” warning message. If you press the Yes button, all grids from the document definition you selected will be deleted. The deletion becomes permanent if you save the application.

To create a new Output Format, do the following: 1.

Click New from the Output menu bar item.

2. In the New Output Format dialog box, type the name of your new format in the Name field. 3. Click the check box to select the Apply Output Format to current document. 86

ScanTools Plus


4. Click OK. If you are scoring and want to store total and/or subtest scores in the output record, you must define fixed length fields in the output record that are not associated with a grid to be used after scoring to store the scores.

Define Output Fields and Append Grids Refer to the tutorials in Appendices A and B to learn how to define fields in the output format and associate grids with them. Online help also describes how to perform this task. The following steps briefly summarize this process: 1.

Open the ScanTools Plus Application Module window.

2. If you are working with a multi-sheet document, select the sheet you will be working on from the Sheet control in the left side of the Application Module window. 3. If the grid requires a translate table, use the Translate tool to define it. You can also import translate tables from a different application into the currently open application. 4. Open the OMR Tool.

User’s Guide

87


The OMR tool is used to define grids on a sheet.

5. If a background form image on the right side of the window is not displayed with enough detail to define the grid starting and ending point, mark reference response positions for the grid you want to define on a sample sheet and load it into your scanner. (Refer to the tutorials in Appendices A and B for hints on how to mark grids.) In the lower left corner of the ScanTools Plus Application Module window, click the Scan Sheet button. After scanning, the marked response positions will be visible in the grid definition area. 6. In the lower left corner of the ScanTools Plus Application Module window, click New. The Output Field Entry dialog box is displayed. 7. Define the name and characteristics of the output field that data from the grid will be transferred to. 8. Click OK. 9. Select Application from the menu bar; then, select Save. For new applications, the Save As dialog box is displayed. Enter a name and number for the application and click OK.

88

ScanTools Plus


NOTE: You can select an existing field in the field list

box to associate with the grid. In that case, skip steps 6 through 8.

10. Select the boundaries of the grid using the OMR Tool. (See the tutorials in Appendices A and B for examples.) 11. In the lower left corner of the ScanTools Plus Application Module window, ensure the field you want is highlighted, click the Append button. This associates the grid with the output field. 12. Repeat steps 6 through 11 for every grid to be defined.

Select Options From the Options selection on the menu bar, you can define other parameters associated with the application definition. These include Sequence of documents, Confirmations, Read Controls, Form ID Matching, and iNAME Configuration. Save the ScanTools Plus Application. Select Application from the menu bar; then, select Save.

Release for Scanning When you have completed defining the application, ensure that Release for Scanning is checked in the Application Settings dialog. This is required for using the application in the ScanTools Plus main screen.

Close ScanTools Plus Application Module Window Select Application from the menu bar; then, select Exit. NOTE: If you are scoring, editing, or converting this

document, refer to the appropriate section or the online help before creating edit, score, or conversion profiles.

User’s Guide

89

Chapter 3: Modify/Create an Application Making an Application Disk

Making an Application Disk Applications are composed of a number of different files that work together. You can copy an application definition file and its associated edit, score, conversion, data files and user exit files. For imaging applications, you can also copy background form files, image clips, iNAME configuration files, and RealTime OCR control files, as needed. NOTE: Additional files required for the optional RealTime

Character Recognition component are automatically included when you check “Data, ICR and Clip Files.”

The Make Application Disk feature is the preferred method to use when you are preparing to migrate an application to a newer version of ScanTools software. NOTE: You are not required to save to a diskette. You can

also save to another location or to another media.

Use the following steps to create an save an application:

90

ScanTools Plus


1.

From the Configure option on the ScanTools Plus menu bar, select Make Application Disk. The Make Application Disk dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the application(s) that you want to copy. 3. In the Copy Input/Configuration Files of Type and Copy Output/Produced Files of Type sections of the dialog box, check every type of file that you want to copy. 4. In the Copy to field, type the drive letter and path where you want the application files copied.

User’s Guide

91


5. Click OK. The Copy Application Files dialog box is displayed:

6. Confirm that these are the files you want to copy and make changes if necessary. 7. Click Copy. The files are copied to the location you entered.

92

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 3: Modify/Create an Application Installing an Application

Installing an Application If you need to use a ScanTools Plus application that resides in a location other than where ScanTools Plus is currently configured in its Paths dialog, use Install Application. This feature copies all application files to the location currently defined in the Paths dialog. The Install Application feature is the preferred method to use when you are preparing to migrate an application to a newer version of ScanTools software. To install an application from any valid drive, use the following procedure: 1.

From the Configure item on the ScanTools Plus menu bar, select Install Application. The Install Application dialog box is displayed.

2. In the Directories panel, select the directory the application files are located in.

User’s Guide

93

Chapter 3: Modify/Create an Application Installing an Application

3. In the Files panel, select the file(s) you want to copy. Once a file is selected, use the Details button to see more information about the application file.

4. Click OK. The application files are copied to the location selected in the Paths dialog.

94

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 3: Modify/Create an Application Deleting an Application

Deleting an Application Deleting an application with ScanTools Plus software enables accurate deletion of all associated files. Use the following steps: 1.

From the Configure item on the ScanTools Plus menu bar, select Delete Application Files. The Delete Application dialog box is displayed:

2. Select the application(s) you want to delete. 3. If necessary, change the check boxes to indicate whether or not application, profile, data files, and other associated files should be deleted.

User’s Guide

95

Chapter 3: Modify/Create an Application Deleting an Application

4. Click OK. The Delete Application Files dialog box is displayed:

5. Confirm that these are the files you want to delete, and make any necessary changes by clicking on the file name to de-select it. 6. Click OK. The files are deleted.

96

ScanTools Plus

In this chapter: Task Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 98 Parts of the ScanTools Plus Window . . . . . . . . . page 99 Configuring the Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 100 Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 102

4

Chapter 4: How to Scan Documents This chapter describes how to scan documents.

User’s Guide

97

Chapter 4: How to Scan Documents Task Summary

Task Summary This section briefly describes how to scan documents. 1.

Configure the context: • • •

Select an Application. Select or Create a Data file. Select an Edit profile (optional - only for editing). NOTE: If you are using an image scanner and edit correction will be performed after scanning (post-scan editing), you should select an edit profile during scanning so that image clips can be acquired and presented properly later in the post-scan editor. Image clips of edit failures are created during scanning, using the edit profile selected at scan time. A different edit profile can be selected for post-scan editing; however, there may not be image clips displayed in the post-scan editor for all edit failures, depending on how the edit profiles differ. A field could have passed editing during scanning, but failed using a different edit profile in post-scan editing, therefore the image clip was not captured during scanning. Additionally, for grayboxes and software bar codes, we recommend the same edit type be used at both scan time and at post-scan editing. •

Select a Score profile (optional - only for online scoring). • Select a Conversion profile (optional - only for online converting). NOTE: You can also start scanning through a context file. Refer to online help for more details. 2. Check the settings in the Scanning Options dialog box (Options menu). 3. Load documents in the scanner and start scanning. 98

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 4: How to Scan Documents Parts of the ScanTools Plus Window

Parts of the ScanTools Plus Window When you start ScanTools Plus software, the ScanTools Plus window is displayed.

This window has three parts: •

The menu bar enables you to configure ScanTools Plus software and access the ScanTools Plus help facility. • The action bar displays buttons to initiate scanning, editing, scoring, converting data files to other formats, and archiving image clips. • The file bar enables quick selection of files to be used in a scanning task. The display of the action bar and file bar is controlled through selections made from the Options menu.

User’s Guide

99

Chapter 4: How to Scan Documents Configuring the Context

Configuring the Context When you scan documents, the final format of the data depends on files that you control; i.e., the application name, the edit profile names, the score profile names, the conversion profile names, and the name of the data file where the data is collected. Together, these selections are called the context of the scanning task. NOTE: You can specify the directories where the files are

located by selecting Configure from the menu bar and then selecting Paths from the drop-down list.

You can specify the context by selecting files in one of three places: •

The file bar (shown below).

•

The menu bar items - Application, Data File, Edit, Score, or Convert. Each of these has a Select item, where you can select the file you need. The Scanning Options dialog box.

•

The File Bar The file bar is displayed beneath the menu bar on the ScanTools Plus main window through selections made from the Options menu. Once displayed, each component of the context (i.e., the Application, Data file, Edit profile, Score profile, and Conversion profile) can be selected from here. NOTE: ScanTools Plus software may override your file bar

selections with the file names you choose in the Scanning Options dialog box.

100

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 4: How to Scan Documents Configuring the Context

The Scanning Options Dialog Box The Scanning Options dialog box offers you even more control over the context than the file bar does. Additional features include the following: • • • • • • •

Automatic naming of data files Enabling/disabling data file and profile choices made on the File Bar For data files that already contain data, whether to append or replace (overwrite) the new data Control of serial, batch, and run numbers Types of errors that will cause ScanTools software to stop the scanner Enabling online edit correction of document records while scanning Setting scanner read parameters for mark threshold and discrimination

To access the Scanning Options dialog box, use the following steps: • •

User’s Guide

Select Options from the menu bar. Select Scanning Options from the drop-down list. The Scanning Options dialog box is displayed.

101

Chapter 4: How to Scan Documents Scanning

Scanning Once you have configured the context for your scanning task, load the documents to be scanned into your scanner. You can start scanning in one of three ways: • • •

Click the Scan button in the action bar Select Actions from the menu bar; then select Scan; or Press the F2 function key

While the scanner is in operation, the Scanning progress window is displayed.

The information contained in this progress window is self-explanatory and varies depending on the context you have selected. IMPORTANT: The ASCII data file created by ScanTools Plus

software can be used without further processing. You can also use ScanTools Plus features for editing, scoring, or converting data files.

Scanning will stop for any of three reasons: • • 102

The scanner runs out of documents. A scanner error, such as a jam or communications error, occurs. ScanTools Plus


•

An edit error; the edit profile that you are using forces scanning to stop.

Scanner Errors A scanner error occurs when your scanner is not capable of performing its basic functions with a sheet, for reasons such as: • • • • •

Unknown form ID marks or timing marks. Skew mark detection failure. A sheet jam in the scanner. Communications errors between the scanner and your computer. Input hopper is empty.

ScanTools Plus software displays the Scanner Error dialog box when scanner errors occur.

User’s Guide

103


The Error(s) and Recovery fields are self-explanatory. They contain detailed information about the nature of the error and the steps that you need to take to recover. The Last document field identifies the last complete document that scanned successfully. Expecting sheet shows which sheet in the current document is expected by ScanTools Plus software. The course of action you take to recover from a scanning error depends on the scanning task you are performing, as well as the nature of the error. • • • •

If scanning stopped and the sheet causing the problem can be corrected, you can restart scanning at that sheet by pressing Resume. If your scanning task allows you to remove the faulty document from the batch and continue scanning, you can restart scanning by pressing Rescan Document. The Rescan Document button is only enabled when you are scanning a booklet and are expecting some sheet other than the start of the document. If you need to stop scanning at that document, press Stop. (Data for prior documents in the batch is saved to the data file.)

Edit Errors The edit profile you select (if any) may contain validation tests or other criteria that documents must conform to; i.e., the presence of data in mandatory fields, the absence of multiple marks, etc. If a document fails an edit profile's tests, ScanTools Plus software can handle the document or document record in one of several ways: •

104

ScanTools Plus software can select the failing document for manual correction, either by stopping the scanner or by diverting the document into the select stacker.

ScanTools Plus


•

•

ScanTools Plus software can queue the failing document record for online edit corrections. An Edit Correction dialog box is displayed during scanning, enabling you to review and correct the error before the document record is saved to the data file. ScanTools Plus does not display image clips during the online edit correction process. ScanTools Plus software can flag the failing document record as it is written to the data file for correction after scanning.

Edit Correction Dialog Box If Online Edit Correction is selected in Scanning Options (does not support Imaging), each time a document fails an edit profile test, the Edit Correction dialog box is displayed during scanning. This dialog box enables you to review and correct the error before the document record is saved to the data file.

User’s Guide

105


To correct each edit failure as it occurs, use the following steps: 1.

Examine the Edit Correction dialog box to see why the data is in error. The Text box shows the invalid data.

2. In the Text box, type the correct data for the field. 3. Click the Next Field button. If the change you made corrects the failure, the status in the Field window for this field will change from Failing to Corrected, and the next failing field will be displayed. If the failed field is set up as an optional correction in the edit profile, you can click Next Field without changing the text; the status in the Field window will change from Failing to Viewed. When all the failed fields in the record have been viewed, the record will be removed from the Edit Correction dialog box. The data file will accept the record with any changes made or not made. The Always Edit type is not presented during online edit correction. You need to run post-scan editing to deal with this edit. See online help for details. If you are using an image scanner, the Graybox Edit type is not presented during online edit correction. You need to run post-scan editing to deal with it. We recommend the same edit type be used at both scan time and at post-scan editing. See online help for details. 4. Repeat step 3 for all fields listed in the Field window. When the last field of this record is corrected, the next record that needs to be corrected will appear when you click Next Field. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for all records in the queue.

106

ScanTools Plus


6. To stop the scanning process, click Stop on the Scanner Error dialog box, and then click Exit on the Edit Queue Not Empty field. You can then resume operation by clicking the Scan button on the ScanTools Plus main window. The scanning and the Online Editing session will continue from where you left off.

User’s Guide

107


NOTES

108

ScanTools Plus

In this chapter: Task Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 110 Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 112 Modifying an Existing Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . page 115 Creating a New Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 117 Creating a Copy of an Edit Profile for use with the Same Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 118 Post-Scan Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 119 Manually Editing Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 124

5

Chapter 5: Editing Data This chapter describes edit profiles and the editing process.

User’s Guide

109

Chapter 5: Editing Data Task Summary

Task Summary This section briefly describes how to modify an existing edit profile, how to create a new edit profile, how to edit a data file using an edit profile, and how to manually edit a data file.

Modify an Existing Edit Profile 1.

From the ScanTools Plus main window, select the application.

2. Select and open the edit profile you want to change. 3. In the Edit Profile window, perform the necessary modifications and save your changes.

Create a New Edit Profile 1.

From the ScanTools Plus main window, select the application.

2. Select New from the Edit menu and assign a name to the edit profile using the first field of the profile. 3. In the Edit Profile window, perform the necessary steps to create the new edit profile and save it.

Editing a Data File Using an Edit Profile 1.

Select the application that is associated with the data file.

2. Select the data file you want to edit. 3. Select the edit profile you want to use. NOTE: If you are using an image scanner, image clips of

edit failures are created during scanning using the edit profile selected at scan time. A different edit profile can be selected for post-scan editing; however, there may not be image clips displayed in

110

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 5: Editing Data Task Summary

the post-scan editor for all edit failures, depending on how the edit profiles differ. A field could have passed editing during scanning, but failed using a different edit profile in post-scan editing, therefore the image clip was not captured during scanning. Also, for grayboxes and software bar codes, we recommend the same edit type be used at both scan time and at post-scan editing. 4. Check the settings in the Edit Options dialog box (Options menu). 5. Select Edit. 6. Make corrections in the Edit Correction window as errors appear.

Manually Edit a Data File 1.

Select the application that is associated with the data file.

2. Select the data file you want to edit. 3. From the Data File item on the menu bar, select Open. 4. Edit the data file in the Modify Data File dialog and save your changes.

User’s Guide

111

Chapter 5: Editing Data Edit Profile

Edit Profile Data editing is used to check field data scanned by ScanTools Plus software. Edit profiles are defined separately from the application, but work only with the specific ScanTools Plus application that was selected when the profile was created. Any number of different edit profiles can be defined for a single ScanTools Plus application. For image scanners, if you want to capture image clips of the failing field, you must have the edit profile selected at scan time. If you do not select an edit profile at scan time, and later perform post-scan editing, image clips are not available for viewing. Several editing methods are available to you. Online Editing and Online Edit Correction both take place at scan time. Post-scan Editing and Manual Editing both take place after scanning has been completed. 1.

Online Editing takes place at scan time using the edit profile selected. Scanned data is checked by an edit profile and actions (reject record, stop scanner, select sheet, etc.) are performed as sheets are scanned, based on whether or not the edit passes or fails. If replacement characters are defined in the edit profile, that action is also performed during scanning. This method is described in Chapter 4 (Scanning).

2. Online Edit Correction also takes place at scan time. This feature is on the Scanning Options dialog. It gives you the ability to review and correct edit failure during scanning before the document record is saved to the data file. The Edit Correction dialog box displays a list of document fields that have failed edit verification based on the current edit profile. If you are using an image scanner, ScanTools Plus does not display image clips during the online edit correction process. This method is described in Chapter 4 (Scanning). 112

ScanTools Plus


CAUTION: Online Edit Correction must not be used

with scan-time iNAME Image Archiving.

3. Post-Scan Editing lets you review and correct records in a data file that have been flagged during a previous scanning session. The Correcting Serial Number dialog box enables you to review and correct errors before the document record is saved to the data file. If you are using an image scanner, we recommend the same edit type be used for grayboxes and software bar codes at both scan time and at post-scan editing. NOTE: If you are using an image or OMR scanner, the

background image of the form comes from a .tif file that must be supplied by the user and defined in the application. The displayed image will be only as good as the user-supplied .tif file. If you have a background .tif file that was not supplied by the form vendor, it may be suitable for application definition, but it might not be suitable for postscan editing or image archiving.

4. Edit Data Files Manually. In this operation, you open the data file, view the field data, and change the data in the view window. No edit profile is associated with this method of editing. Use this method sparingly; only for data that has been erroneously sent to the data file. The On Failure dialog box in the edit profile enables you to select the type of action to be performed on edit failures. These settings apply to Online Editing, Online Edit Correction, and Post-scan Editing. For example, you can: • •

User’s Guide

Flag failed records so that you review them later during a post-scan editing session. Clip images of failed fields (if you are using an image scanner) so that you can review them later during a post-scan editing session.

113


•

Reject failed records so that they do not even appear in the destination data file. • Stop the scanner on a failing field so that you can fix the problem. • Select the failing sheet and send it to a select stacker (if your scanner has one) during the scanning process without stopping the scanner. Then, when the scanning session is over, you can correct all these rejected sheets and rescan them. • Use the transport printer (if the scanner has one installed) to print a message about failed fields and their contents to help pinpoint the failures. • Flag a graybox field (if you are using an image scanner) so that you can perform key from image later. • Flag a software bar code field (if you are using an image scanner) so that you can perform key from image later. • Flag a graybox ICR/OCR field (if you are using an image scanner and you have installed the optional RealTime Character Recognition component) so that you can perform key from image later. See online help for more detailed information about the settings required for the type of editing you need to perform with your application.

114

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 5: Editing Data Modifying an Existing Edit Profile

Modifying an Existing Edit Profile Whenever you modify an existing edit profile or create a new one, you use the Edit Profile window. To modify an edit profile, select Open from the Edit menu; the Edit Profile dialog box is displayed.

The window lists: • • • •

The file name of the edit profile you selected. The application associated with the edit profile. The document(s) associated with the application. All fields within a document and details of the edit defined for each field.

NOTE: If you selected “Sample Applications and Files”

during installation, the 801 Sample Application was installed. The associated edit profile, 801 sample.$ep,

User’s Guide

115

Chapter 5: Editing Data Modifying an Existing Edit Profile

is installed in the Profiles directory under the directory where ScanTools Plus software is installed (the default is C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\Profiles). You can examine this sample edit profile while we describe it here.

Using the Mouse to Display Fields in Documents By default, the Edit Profile window displays the field titles of all documents associated with the ScanTools Plus application. To hide/delete field options, do the following: 1.

In the Edit Profile window, move the mouse pointer to the document name and press the right or left mouse button. A selection box is displayed.

2. Move the mouse pointer to the appropriate option (e.g., Show All Field Edit Options), and press the right or left mouse button. All fields in all documents and the edit options associated with them are displayed.

Changing Edit Profile Parameter Values To change edit profile values, move the mouse pointer over the value of the parameter you want to change, and press the right or left mouse button. Whenever the mouse pointer is over a changeable value, it changes from an arrow to a magnifying glass. The action of the mouse pointer varies, depending on the type of parameter being changed. • •

In some cases, the mouse pointer toggles the parameter between two different values. In other cases, a selection box is displayed listing available options.

NOTE: For information on options available when

modifying an edit profile, press the F1 key to display ScanTools Plus online help.

116

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 5: Editing Data Creating a New Edit Profile

Creating a New Edit Profile 1.

Open the Edit Profile window by selecting New from the Edit menu in the ScanTools Plus main window. The window displays the documents associated with the application. Edit options for all fields in all documents default to No Edit.

2. Use the steps in the Modifying an Existing Edit Profile procedure to change the default values in the edit profile.

User’s Guide

117

Chapter 5: Editing Data Creating a Copy of an Edit Profile for use with the Same Application

Creating a Copy of an Edit Profile for use with the Same Application You can create a copy of an edit profile for use with the same application it was copied from. This can save time when you need more than one edit profile for an application. To do this, open the existing edit profile, give it a new name, and save it. You can continue to make changes to the parameter values. See online help for details.

118

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 5: Editing Data Post-Scan Editing

Post-Scan Editing This section describes how to have ScanTools Plus software edit an existing data file after scanning by using an edit profile. Chapter 4 (Scanning) describes how to use edit profiles for online editing which occurs during scanning.

Selecting Edit Options From the Options menu, select Edit Options. The Edit Options dialog box is displayed.

NOTE: The settings in this dialog box affect only the

currently selected application. Each application has its own Edit Options settings. You should check the Edit Options settings each time you select a different application and before you edit a data file.

The Data File group box and the Edit Profile group box determine what data file and edit profile will be used for post-scan editing. Also, you can select from one of the following options:

User’s Guide

119


•

•

•

Edit normally: Presents records for correction that have not yet been accepted, as indicated in the NCS Header, including records that an edit profile has not yet verified and any records that previously may have failed an edit verification. Recheck all records for edit failures: Presents records for correction that are currently failing an edit, regardless of the state of the NCS Header. By using this edit mode, all records that were accepted with errors will be presented for correction. Clear all edit flags: No editing is performed when this option is selected. All edit flags in the NCS Header of the selected data file are cleared. Any pass or grid error flags are replaced with spaces in the NCS Header area of the data file. Records that were flagged for online edit correction or post-scan editing will have their flags removed.

Selecting the Application, Data File, and Edit Profile To automatically edit a data file, first select the application that was used to create the data file; then, select the data file and the edit profile that contains the criteria for selecting invalid document records in the data file. NOTE: Both the data file and the edit profile must be

associated with the same application before automatic editing can occur. For image scanners, if a different edit profile is selected for post-scan editing than was selected during scanning, there may not be image clips displayed in the post-scan editor for all edit failures — depending on how the edit profiles differ. A field could have passed editing during scanning, but failed using a different edit profile in post-scan editing, therefore the image clip was not captured during scanning. Additionally, for grayboxes and software bar codes, we recommend the same edit type be used at both scan time and at post-scan editing.

120

ScanTools Plus


Starting the Edit Cycle After selecting the application, the data file, and the edit profile, you can start the edit cycle in one of three ways: • Click the Edit button in the action bar • Select Actions from the menu bar, then select Edit • Press the F3 function key

Making Corrections When you start the edit cycle, ScanTools Plus software evaluates the document records in the data file according to the criteria described in the edit profile. If ScanTools Plus software encounters invalid data in a field, it displays the following Correcting Serial Number dialog box:

User’s Guide

121


NOTE: Image will be displayed only when using an image

scanner.

The contents of the failing field are displayed in the Text field. The underline (_) indicates edit failures. You can correct the contents of the field by moving the cursor to the field and deleting or typing over the information. When Auto Advance is checked, the cursor moves automatically from failure to failure. When you are at the last failing field in one record, you automatically advance to the first failing field in the next record. If a document

122

ScanTools Plus


has no failures, the record is not displayed. The state of Auto Advance (on or off) is saved between edit sessions. To move between records, use one of the following buttons: • •

•

•

•

User’s Guide

Quit to leave the editor. Changes made to records prior to the current record are saved. Changes made to the current record are not saved. Delete Record sets the Delete flag in the NCS Header. Once you have marked a record for deletion, it is not actually deleted until you perform post-scan conversion on the data file. You must do the converting after you close the data file. Suspend Record writes the changes you have made to the current record but keeps the record flagged as an edit failure. For example, if you cannot complete the edit, selecting the Suspend Record button causes the record to be returned to the data file still marked as failing edit; therefore, when editing resumes, the record will be presented again for correction. You do not leave the data editor when you select this button. Accept as Good marks the current document record as passing all edits, even if not all failures have been corrected. Accept as Good is not honored if any of the failing edits are mandatory and have not yet been corrected. Previous Record edits a previous failing record in the Field list; allows only one previous record to be edited. This button is displayed only if at least one record has already been edited.

123

Chapter 5: Editing Data Manually Editing Data Files

Manually Editing Data Files You may also edit document records (without the use of an edit profile) by using the Modify Data File window.

Selecting the Data File To select a data file, you must first select the application that was used to create the data file; then, select Data file from the menu bar and Open from the Data file menu. The Modify Data File window is displayed:

Using the Modify Data File Window Use the Modify Data File window to display and edit a specific document record. Displaying a Specific Document Record When the Modify Data File window is displayed, the first document record is shown in the window. Use the Go To button and the up/down arrow buttons in the lower right 124

ScanTools Plus


corner of the window to select the serial number of the document record you want to edit. Editing the Displayed Document Record To edit the data displayed in the Modify Data File window, move the cursor to the data you want to change and type over it. The following buttons are displayed in the Modify Data File window during your editing session: • • • • •

•

OK saves any editing changes you made and closes the window. Cancel deletes the editing changes you made and closes the window. Print prints the contents of the document records you select. Find searches for a character string you specify among all document records. Options displays a dialog box that enables you to show or suppress the display of the NCS Header data or of spaces in the document record. It also enables you to select the fonts used for displaying or printing document records. Delete Record marks the displayed document record for deletion. The button label changes to Undelete Record if the record has already been marked for deletion.

NOTE: Deleted records are not removed from the data file;

they are simply marked as deleted. Post-scan conversion of this data file will ignore any deleted records.

User’s Guide

125


NOTES

126

ScanTools Plus

In this chapter: Task Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 128 Score Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 130 The Score Profile Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 131 Modify or Create a Score Profile . . . . . . . . . . . page 132 Create a Copy of a Score Profile for use with the Same Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 135 Changing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 136 Scoring an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Scoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 137

6

Chapter 6: Scoring Data This chapter describes score profiles and the scoring process.

User’s Guide

127

Chapter 6: Scoring Data Task Summary

Task Summary This section briefly describes how to modify an existing score profile, how to create a new score profile, how to score during scanning, and how to score an existing data file.

Modify an Existing Score Profile 1.

From the ScanTools Plus main window, select an application and score profile.

2. Open the score profile. 3. Make the necessary modifications and save your changes.

Create a New Score Profile 1.

From the ScanTools Plus main window, select an application.

2. Select New from the Score menu and assign a name to the score profile using the first field of the profile. 3. Ensure that the record format has room to store the scores. NOTE: This step can be omitted if scores will not be

stored in the document records.

4. Make the necessary modifications and save your changes.

Score During Scanning (Online Scoring) 1.

Select an application.

2. Select a score profile. 3. Check the settings in the Scanning Options dialog box (Options menu). 128

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 6: Scoring Data Task Summary

4. Select Scan.

Score an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Scoring) 1.


2. Select a data file. 3. Select a score profile. 4. Check the settings in the Score Options dialog box (Options menu). 5. Select Score.

User’s Guide

129

Chapter 6: Scoring Data Score Profile

Score Profile ScanTools Plus software can score single-answer multiplechoice or true/false tests while they are being scanned or they can be scored later (after the sheets have been scanned) using the data files. Score profiles contain the rules that ScanTools Plus software needs to score the documents. Each score profile is associated with a ScanTools Plus application. To select a score profile from among those available in your forms application: • •

Select Score from the menu bar; then, click Select Use the Score profile box in the file bar.

Score profiles can be used in two ways: • •

130

Online Scoring. You can select a score profile to score data during scanning. Post-Scan Scoring. You can select a score profile to score an existing ScanTools Plus data file.

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 6: Scoring Data The Score Profile Window

The Score Profile Window Whenever you view or modify an existing score profile or create a new one, the Score Profile window is displayed.

This window enables you to change or enter the score profile parameters. When viewing the profile, you can only read the parameters; you cannot change them.

User’s Guide

131

Chapter 6: Scoring Data Modify or Create a Score Profile

Modify or Create a Score Profile To modify a score profile, do the following: 1.

On the Score menu, click Select.

2. In the Select Score Profile dialog box, highlight the file name of the score profile you want to modify; then click OK. 3. On the Score menu, click Open to display the Score Profile dialog box. 4. Modify the profile using steps that are appropriate for the areas in the profile you are modifying. To create a score profile, do the following: 1.

Before creating a new score profile, you need to open the application to check some fields. •

•

•

132

Make sure that a field in a document being used for scoring has Type defined as 1-digit or 2-digit in the Output Field Entry dialog box. This is often referred to as an Items field. Make sure that any field created to store the total test score is set up as Type Numeric and Fixed Length of 5 (or greater) in the Output Field Entry dialog box (in this example, the field is named Total Score). There should be no grid associated with that field (i.e., displays with an asterisk in the field definition area of the Application Definition window). Make sure that any field created to store a subtest score is set up as Type Numeric and Fixed Length of 4 in the Output Field Entry dialog box. There should be no grid associated with that field (i.e., displays with an asterisk in the Fields definition area of the Application Definition window). ScanTools Plus


2. On the Score menu of the ScanTools Plus main window, select New to display the Score Profile (Untitled) window. 3. Move your mouse pointer over the first field in the window, the Score Profile File Name entry (Untitled) and click. The Profile Name dialog box is displayed. 4. Enter a name for the profile, and click OK. 5. The next 5 lines of the display are application-wide options. Click any of the lines that you want to change. •

Key Data dialog box: Select Keys scanned online or Keys stored in profile. NOTE: When keys are not stored in the Score Profile, and post-scan scoring is performed, you will be prompted to browse to the key data file to be used for scoring.

•

You can toggle between Apply edits to key data and Do not apply edits to key data. This option is displayed only if Keys scanned online is enabled. • Store Keys/Append dialog box enables you to select if key data is also to be stored in the output file. • Print Scores dialog box enables you to select which scores will be printed on the document. • You can toggle between Sheet Compile Compatibility Off and On. 6. Click the document name and a popup menu is displayed. Select Add Subtest; the Add Subtest dialog box is displayed. 7. Enter a name for the subtest and click OK.

User’s Guide

133


8. Go to the Store total score in field: none entry. Click none to display the Total Score dialog box. 9. Select the field name you want and click OK. 10. By default, Formula Scoring is disabled. If you want to use formula scoring, click the line, No Formula Scoring to display the Scoring Factor dialog box. In this dialog you can define the parameters for Formula Scoring. 11. If you want to do translates, click Translates to display the Translate dialog box. 12. Repeat steps 6-11 for each subtest. The only difference is in step 8 where you click the Store subtest score in field: none instead of Store total score in field: none. 13. Click the Save button along the bottom of the dialog box; then click OK. You have completed the score profile. If you want more details on the parameters, see online help.

134

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 6: Scoring Data Create a Copy of a Score Profile for use with the Same Application

Create a Copy of a Score Profile for use with the Same Application You can create a copy of a score profile for use with the same application it was copied from. This can save time when you need more than one score profile for an application. To do this, open the existing score profile, give it a new name, and save it. You can continue to make changes to the parameter values. See online help for details.

User’s Guide

135

Chapter 6: Scoring Data Changing Parameter Values

Changing Parameter Values Changing parameter values in a profile is simply a matter of moving the mouse pointer over the value of the parameter you want to change and pressing the right or left mouse button. Whenever the mouse pointer is over a changeable value, the pointer changes from a hand to a magnifying glass. The action of the mouse pointer varies depending on the type of parameter being changed. • •

In some cases, the mouse pointer will toggle the parameter between two different values. In other cases, a selection box will appear displaying available options.

You are encouraged to experiment with any of the sample score profiles (.$SP) associated with Sample Applications 701 and 801 to learn how to change parameters.

136

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 6: Scoring Data Scoring an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Scoring)

Scoring an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Scoring) To score an existing data file, use the following steps: 1.

Select the application associated with the data file.

2. Check the currently defined Score Options. 3. Select the Data File. 4. Select the Score Profile. 5. Choose one of these actions: • Click the Score button on the action bar. • Select Actions, Score from the menu bar. • Press the F5 function key. 6. Browse to the key data file when applicable. A dialog box showing the progress of the scoring is displayed.

User’s Guide

137

Chapter 6: Scoring Data Scoring an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Scoring)

NOTES

138

ScanTools Plus

In this chapter: Task Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 140 Conversion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 142 Output Formats for Converted Files . . . . . . . . page 143 The Conversion Profile Window . . . . . . . . . . . page 148 Modify or Create a Conversion Profile . . . . . . page 150 Create a Copy of a Conversion Profile for use with the Same Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 151 Changing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 152 Converting an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Converting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 153

7

Chapter 7: Converting Data This chapter describes the conversion profile and how to convert standard ScanTools Plus data files into other data formats.

User’s Guide

139

Chapter 7: Converting Data Task Summary

Task Summary This section briefly describes how to modify an existing conversion profile, create a new conversion profile, convert a data file during scanning, and convert an existing data file.

Modify an Existing Conversion Profile 1.


2. Open a conversion profile. 3. Make the necessary modifications and save your changes.

Create a New Conversion Profile 1.


2. Select New from the Convert menu and assign a name to the conversion profile using the first field of the profile. 3. Make the necessary modifications and save your changes.

Convert During Scanning (Online Converting) 1.


2. Select a conversion profile. 3. Check the settings in the Scanning Options dialog box (Options menu). NOTE: If you are performing online conversion, the

Scanning Option, Replace At Serial Number (S/N) is not available at scan time.

140

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 7: Converting Data Task Summary

4. Select Scan.

Convert an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Converting) 1.


2. Select a data file. 3. Select a conversion profile. 4. Check the settings in the Conversion Options dialog box (Options menu). 5. Select Convert.

User’s Guide

141

Chapter 7: Converting Data Conversion Profile

Conversion Profile When you scan documents using ScanTools Plus software, document records are written to a standard text file in ScanTools Plus software format. This format is described in Appendix C. ScanTools Plus software can also write a second, separate data file in any of several different output formats. ScanTools Plus software writes the converted data file either during or after scanning. Refer to online help for details. Depending on which output format you choose, you may need to select options in two other areas: • •

During scanning - for online conversion during scanning whether or not both data and converted files are created. NCS Header Year Format - format of the year in the NCS Header of the converted data file, either two or four digits.

You can use conversion profiles in two ways: •

•

142

Online Conversion. During scanning you can select a conversion profile to convert data during scanning and automatically create another data file in a different format. This method is described in Chapter 4 (Scanning). Post-Scan Converting. After scanning, you can select a conversion profile to convert an existing ScanTools Plus data file into a different format. Another reason to perform post-scan conversion is to create a new file in which some records are deleted.

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 7: Converting Data Output Formats for Converted Files

Output Formats for Converted Files ScanTools Plus data files can be converted into the output formats listed below: • • • • • •

Delimited ASCII Fixed length records SPSS® for Windows DOSSIER® IBM 3881 (ASCII or EBCDIC character sets) Y2K Compliant

The following output format types can no longer be defined when creating or modifying conversion profiles. If you have existing conversion profiles with these types, you may still run them: • • •

DIF Sheet Compile SPSS/PC+

Delimited ASCII (.DLM, .TXT, or .CSV) This format enables you to define how to mark (delimit) the beginning or end of a field. When you select this format, you must specify: • • • •

User’s Guide

Record Delimiter. The character(s) that ends every document record. The default is the Carriage Return/ Linefeed (CR/LF) character pair. Field Delimiter. The character that separates data fields. The default is a comma. Text Envelope. In ScanTools Plus software, the character that marks the beginning and end of every field. The default is the double quote ( " ). Header Record. Delimited conversion optionally creates a “Header Record” which contains the field names as defined in the application. The “Header Record” will be the first record. 143


The default settings are compatible with the “comma-separated field” format that is easily imported to many popular database and spreadsheet programs.

Fixed Length Records (.SDF) The format is identical to the standard data file format used by ScanTools Plus software, with the following exceptions: • • •

The document record delimiters (which are the CR/ LF characters in the standard format) can be changed to any other character string you specify. The converted output file is not terminated by a Ctrl-Z character. Data fields can be omitted.

SPSS for Windows (.SPS and .DA1) This format is used by the SPSS for Windows statistical analysis program. When you specify this format, ScanTools Plus software creates one or two files, depending on which converted file header format (two-digit or four-digit) you selected in the NCS Header Year Format - Conversion Profile. When SPSS for Windows is used, you cannot change the During Scanning option to choose which files are created during scanning. •

•

144

A text file (with the .SPS extension) contains commands used by SPSS. The text file is always produced, regardless of whether you selected a two- or four-digit year for the converted header. The text file is used with the appropriate .DAT or .DA1 data file. If you selected a two-digit year for the converted header, the .SPS file works with the standard ScanTools Plus data file (.DAT). A converted output file (with the .DA1 extension) is created only if you selected a 4-digit year for the converted header year format. This file is a copy of the original data file (.DAT) but without the end-of-file ScanTools Plus


marker. Also, the converted output file is longer, because it has a 42-character header to accommodate the 4-digit year in the header. The file is in SPSScompatible format. NOTE: The SPSS conversion format does not support appending to the converted output file. Instead, the converted output file will be replaced. ScanTools Plus software determines and produces the appropriate files, depending on which NCS Header year format is currently selected (2- or 4-digit). You can select any of the following Save options: • • • •

Do not Save active file. Save as compressed active file. Save as uncompressed system file. Save as portable file (EXPORT command). NOTE: When ScanTools Plus software creates a .SPS

file, the field names, which do not conform to SPSS variable naming conventions, are aliased to acceptable similar names.

Refer to the documentation for your SPSS for Windows program for information on these options.

DOSSIER (.DSA or .DSE) The DOSSIER format enables emulation of Sentry® 7008 and 7018 scanners. It contains document record headers with control fields that describe the data in each document record. You can specify that data files be written in either

User’s Guide

145


ASCII (.DSA) or EBCDIC (.DSE) code. Table 1 lists the contents of the DOSSIER document record header. Table 1 Field

Length

Source of data

Program ID

2

Entered in response to a prompt

Document ID

1

Entered in response to a prompt

Batch number

3

NCS Header

Filler

1

Not used

Serial check digit

1

Computed

Filler

1

Not used

Serial number

4

Lowest 4 digits of ScanTools Plus serial number

Page ID

1

Number of pages in the document

Filler

1

Not used

Doc error flag

1

Always blank

Run number

1

NCS Header

Pocket flag

1

NCS Header

Delete flag

1

Always blank

Worst mark intensity factor

1

NCS Header

Invalid response count

3

NCS Header

Grid error flag

1

NCS Header

IBM 3881 (.ASC or .EBC) The IBM 3881 format emulates the structure of files created by an IBM 3881 optical mark reader. Files can be written either in ASCII (.ASC) or EBCDIC (.EBC). 146

ScanTools Plus


ScanTools Plus software enables you to select the following parameters for the IBM 3881 conversion profile: • Character set: ASCII or EBCDIC. The default is EBCDIC. • Record delimiter: Any character or none. The default is none. • Serial numbering: Yes or No. The default is No. • Select on: Select document record on any of the following conditions: • Pocket flag select (default) (NCS Header position 29). • Edit flag select (NCS Header position 22). • No flag select (do not select). • Input multiple: Defines the character that represents multiple responses within a response position. The default is asterisk (*). • Output multiple: Defines the character in the converted file that represents multiple responses within a response position. Options are: • EBCDIC 3F (default) • “@” symbol

Y2K Compliant (.Y2K) The Y2K Compliant format produces a converted file nearly identical to the ScanTools Plus data file, except the date scanned in the NCS Header is always a four-character year (either 19xx or 20xx), not a two-character year. Like the ScanTools Plus data file, when scanning multiple documents that use record formats of different lengths, each output record is padded with spaces, if necessary, to make all records equal in length to the longest record format. A carriage return/line feed is used to terminate each record, and an end-of-file marker (Ctrl-Z) is displayed after the last record. The file extension for this file is .Y2K. User’s Guide

147

Chapter 7: Converting Data The Conversion Profile Window

The Conversion Profile Window Whenever you modify an existing conversion profile or create a new one, the Conversion Profile window is displayed:

This window enables you to select conversion profile parameters, as follows: • •

• 148

Conversion profile: Name of the conversion profile or (untitled) if you are creating a new conversion profile. During scanning: As documents are scanned, whether you want both a ScanTools Plus data file and a converted data file to be created or just a converted data file. Output format: Output format of the converted file. ScanTools Plus

Chapter 7: Converting Data The Conversion Profile Window

•

•

User’s Guide

NCS Header Year Format: Two- or four-digit year format. NOTE: Beneath this parameter, several other parameters may be listed (field delimiter, text envelope, input multiple, etc.) depending on the output format you select. Record format: Controls whether fields defined in the application are included or omitted from the converted data file.

149

Chapter 7: Converting Data Modify or Create a Conversion Profile

Modify or Create a Conversion Profile If you want to modify an existing conversion profile, do the following: 1.

On the Convert menu, click Select.

2. In the Select Conversion dialog box, highlight the file name of the conversion profile you want to modify; then click OK. 3. On the Convert menu, click Open to display the Conversion Profile dialog box. If you want to create a new conversion profile, do the following: 1.

On the Convert menu, click New.

2. In the Conversion Profile dialog box, move the mouse pointer to the word (Untitled) and press the right or left mouse button. 3. In the Profile Name dialog box, type a name for the new conversion profile. 4. Click OK. A new conversion profile is created and loaded with default parameter values.

150

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 7: Converting Data Create a Copy of a Conversion Profile for use with the Same Application

Create a Copy of a Conversion Profile for use with the Same Application You can create a copy of a conversion profile for use with the same application it was copied from. This can save time when you need more than one conversion profile for an application. To do this, open the existing conversion profile, give it a new name, and save it. You can continue to make changes to the parameter values. See online help for details.

User’s Guide

151

Chapter 7: Converting Data Changing Parameter Values

Changing Parameter Values Changing parameter values in a profile is simply a matter of moving the mouse pointer over the value of the parameter you want to change and pressing the right or left mouse button. Whenever the mouse pointer is over a changeable value, the pointer changes from a hand to a magnifying glass. The action of the mouse pointer varies, depending on the type of parameter being changed. • • •

In some cases, the mouse pointer will toggle the parameter between two different values. In other cases, a selection box is displayed listing available options. When selecting fields to be included or omitted from the converted data file, pointing at the field name and clicking the mouse button causes the field name to move to the opposite column. NOTE: If the NCS Header is selected to be included, you may optionally convert the date from a two-digit year to a four-digit year.

You are encouraged to experiment with the sample conversion profiles (.$CP) associated with Sample Applications 701 and 801 to learn how to change parameters.

152

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 7: Converting Data Converting an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Converting)

Converting an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Converting) To convert an existing data file, use the following steps: 1.

Select the application associated with the data file.

2. Check the currently defined Conversion Options. 3. Select the Data File you want to convert. 4. Select the Conversion Profile. 5. Choose one of these actions: • • •

Click the Convert button on the action bar, or Select Actions from the menu bar and Convert from the Actions menu, or Press the F6 key.

A dialog box showing the progress of the conversion is displayed. The converted file is placed in the data files path defined in the Configure menu's Path dialog box. The default is C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\Data Files directory.

User’s Guide

153

Chapter 7: Converting Data Converting an Existing Data File (Post-Scan Converting)

NOTES

154

ScanTools Plus

In this chapter: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iNAME Scan-Time Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . iNAME Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post-Scan Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 155 page 159 page 162 page 166

8

Chapter 8: Archiving Images Overview During scanning, image scanners running with ScanTools Plus can capture an image of any of the following items: • • • •

OMR grid bar code graybox entire side of a sheet

The image clips are: • • User’s Guide

collected during scanning – the OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 scanner must use the OMR with Imaging cartridge during scanning. viewed when post-scan editing the data record. 155

Chapter 8: Archiving Images Overview

•

archived – this is optional, each image can be saved as a .tif or .jpg image file.

Archiving saves each individual image clip in a separate image file, and can sometimes take longer than scanning. The factors involved include: • • • • • • •

the time it takes to get and decompress the image clip and the background .tif. This varies based on the compression rate of these images. the time it takes to combine the two images. This should not vary except by image area clipped. the time it takes to compress and write the compressed image. This can vary greatly based on the chosen compression type. the compressibility of the image. the PC being used for archiving. the speed of the full storage path where the image is to be stored. the network traffic/server load if the results are written to network storage.

Archiving of images can be done in one of these ways: •

156

Scan-Time Archiving – done during scanning. Uses iNAME Image Archiving. This function gives you greater flexibility in naming the archive directory path and files. Online edit correction cannot be used with iNAME scan-time archiving. If you need to edit scanned data or to rescore, you must use post-scan editing and scoring, and any changes will be reflected in the iNAME file names and indexes. After scanning, if you have the .tif file(s) of the background of the form being scanned, it can be merged with the individual image clips, resulting in the clips positioned over the appropriate area of the form. This is done using iNAME Merge. The background .tif file(s) should be supplied from the vendor who designed the form. ScanTools Plus


•

Post-Scan Archiving – done separately after scanning. Uses the data file and a corresponding .tif file that was generated during scanning, Archive Options, and the Archive button in ScanTools Plus. You can use online edit correction during scanning. Optionally, if you have the .tif file(s) of the background of the form being scanned, it can be merged with the individual image clips, resulting in the clips positioned over the appropriate area of the form. The background .tif file(s) should be supplied from the vendor who designed the form. NOTE: If you have a background .tif file that was not supplied by the form vendor, it may be suitable for application definition, but it might not be suitable for image archiving or post-scan editing.

Either method of archiving requires certain items to be defined in the ScanTools Plus application before scanning is performed. It is best to decide which method of archiving you will use when you are defining the application. Archiving produces two types of output files: •

User’s Guide

Clip Files. Each image of a grid and/or whole sheet generates its own image file. Scan-time archiving allows a greater choice of assigning file names. Post-scan archiving uses the six-digit document serial number assigned during scanning, plus the suffix defined in the application definition. The archive clips have a .TIF file extension for compression types Packbits RLE, CCITT G3 Fax, and CCITT G4 Fax. JPEG compression archive clips have a .JPG file extension. Archive clips can be written in any of the supported compression formats and bit depths. If a background form .tif file is not used, the clip file is written with the same bit depth as defined in the ScanTools Plus application.

157


When a background form .tif file is used, the depth of the clip determines the bit depth of the final archived image, as follows: •

•

158

Bitone clip, the background form is converted to a bitone image and a single bitone image is written to disk. • 4-bit clip (only supported with RLE compression), the background form is converted to a 16 gray tone image, resulting in a 4-bit grayscale .tif file. • 8-bit non-JPEG clip, 240 palette entries are reserved for grayscale data from the clip, and 16 palette entries are reserved for the most popular colors from the form, resulting in an 8-bit palleted color .tif file. • JPEG clip, the clip file is a 24-bit color JPG file. Index Files. The archiving process generates an index file for the archived image files. The index file is not used by ScanTools Plus, but is for the image retrieval system that will be used to store and access the image files. You specify the format you want for the index file. For post-scan archiving, you specify where the index file will reside. For iNAME, the index file is written to the same location as the data file.

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 8: Archiving Images iNAME Scan-Time Archiving

iNAME Scan-Time Archiving iNAME scan-time archiving provides the following features: • •

•

• • •

• • •

User’s Guide

Scan-Time Archiving - image files are created during scanning; no need to archive as a separate action after scanning. Full Sheet Image Archive - allows single sheets with no form ID marks and/or no timing marks to be archived. To use this feature, the application must be defined as a single document with a single sheet. Each side of the sheet can be archived as a separate file. For details, see online help. User Exits - if your user exit is defined in the Application Settings dialog, iNAME can be performed before or after your user exits. If your user exit is defined in the iNAME Configuration, it is always run after iNAME. iNAME Configuration - definition of iNAME archiving parameters is included as part of the ScanTools Plus application definition. Images to Archive - you select which grids and/or sheet sides to archive, based on all available in the ScanTools Plus application. Archive Image Scaling - optional; used to change the resolution of the scanned images during archive (See the Application Settings dialog box). The archived images can be saved in resolutions of 200, 240, 300, 400, or 600 DPI. Archive Directory Path - a user-defined location, full path name is defined using a Base path name and Variable path name for destination of image files. Archive File Names - user-defined names, full file name can be defined using a Base name and Variable name for each image file name. Index Entries - more options are available than with post-scan archiving. 159


NOTE: Online edit correction cannot be used with

iNAME scan-time archiving; if you attempt to, you receive an error message. Only post-scan editing can be used. The image clips taken during scanning will be used for post-scan editing. To ensure you have the image clips you need for post-scan editing, you should select the edit profile during scanning and use the same edit profile later during post-scan editing. If you use a different edit profile than the one used during scanning, you may not have the image clips to view in the postscan editor.

Application Definition for iNAME Scan-Time Archiving This section describes briefly what is needed for a typical application with requirements of form ID marks, timing marks, OMR grids, bar codes, and grayboxes. iNAME requires the following items be defined in the ScanTools Plus application: •

•

160

Application Settings dialog: • Enable iNAME is required to perform the image archiving. • Enable Image is required for the side(s) of the sheet that contains OMR grids, grayboxes, and bar codes for which you want archive images generated. • Release for Scanning is checked when the application has been completely defined. Image Clips dialog, for each sheet of each document, select the Clip Grayscale (grayscale/ bitone) choice, the Clip Compression type, and Clipping Mode of Whole Sheet. This sets parameters for all individual clips to the same values. If you want the flexibility to have certain individual clips set with different clip parameters, change the Clipping Mode to Sparse (individual). This keeps the Whole Sheet

ScanTools Plus


settings intact, but also allows you to assign different clip parameters for each OMR grid/graybox/bar code when you use the individual Clip Attributes dialogs. NOTE: The background form image file and rotation are selected in the Add/Replace Background Form Images dialog and displayed in the Image Clips dialog. The file is not used at scan time by iNAME. The background form image is not included in the image files generated by iNAME archiving, but can be used for the post-scan iNAME Merge function, detailed below. •

Clip Attributes dialog, for each field for which you want an image clip produced, under Archive, File Name Suffix, enter a unique, meaningful name. The name you enter will then be available as an Image to Archive when you configure the iNAME parameters. Do not check Archive this Clip; that would produce a duplicate set of image files which would double the storage needed for image files. If you selected Sparse (individual clips) in the Image Clips dialog, you can also change the Grayscale, Compression, and other related clip parameters in each separate Clip Attributes dialog. • iNAME Configuration, as part of the ScanTools Plus application definition, you must create an iNAME configuration. Use the Options menu, iNAME Configuration item to do this. It creates an .ini file with the same name as the application. The .ini file contains all the archive parameters needed for scan-time archiving. This includes which images to archive, whether to use the image format parameters from the Image Clips dialog (whole sheet settings), or from the Clip Attributes dialogs (individual clip settings), directory path and file names, index file entries, and the index file format. At scan time, select the ScanTools application and edit profile (if needed). Archiving of image clips will automatically be performed during scanning using the parameters from the iNAME configuration information. User’s Guide

161

Chapter 8: Archiving Images iNAME Merge

iNAME Merge The image files generated by scan-time iNAME image archiving do not contain the background form image and are not rotated or scaled during scanning. iNAME Merge is a post-scan operation that enables you to do any combination of the following tasks for whole sheet clips and/or individual grid clips: • • •

Merge the background form image into the image files that were generated during scanning. Rotate the image clips generated during scanning, for better viewing. Scale image clips to 200, 240, 300, 400, or 600 DPI to match the requirements of the application using the images.

iNAME Merge is performed after scanning is complete. It can be run in two ways: • •

Automatically, at the end of a scanning session; this option is defined as part of the iNAME configuration. Manually, after scanning, using the iNAME Merge button on the ScanTools Plus main screen.

Application Definition for iNAME Merge Before iNAME Merge is run, the following items should be checked in the ScanTools application. If you are running it automatically at the end of a scanning session, you should check these items before you scan. If you are running it separately after scanning is complete, you can check them after scanning and make any necessary changes before you run it. 1.

162

For Background Merging: In the application, check the Add/Replace Background Form Images dialog box and ensure that the appropriate Top and Bottom Background Form Image files are displayed. These are the background form image .tif ScanTools Plus


files that were supplied by the vendor who produced the form. If the file names are not correct, change the selection. In addition to specifying background form image files, the Add/Replace Background Form Images dialog is used, if necessary, to rotate the background form image into the scanned orientation required for application definition. Scanned orientation may not be suitable for optimal viewing after scanning; however, you can use iNAME Configuration to change the rotation of the scanned and background images together for best viewing. NOTE: If you have a background .tif file that was not

supplied by the form vendor, it may be suitable for application definition, but it might not be suitable for image archiving or post-scan editing.

The Fix Light Background Images and Remove Black From Background options can be enabled on the Image Clips dialog box, if needed. These affect only the background image. For whole sheet clips, the settings on the Image Clips dialog are the only items needed for merging. 2. For Best Alignment of Merged Background Form Image and Scanned Image: If your printed form and corresponding background form image have the required form ID mark in the correct location and two timing marks at least four inches apart, use the OMR/ Merge Horizontal Adjustment in the Application Settings dialog box. This improves the alignment of the two images along the horizontal direction (x axis). See online help for details. 3. For Rotation: Whole sheet and individual grid rotation are defined differently. For whole sheet clips, set the desired rotation in the iNAME Configuration, Enter Image To Archive Information dialog box.

User’s Guide

163


For individual grid clips, set the desired rotation for each grid in the Clip Attributes dialog box. If a background form image is being merged with an image clip, the two are rotated together, using the defined rotation. 4. For Image Scaling: In the application, set Archive Image Scaling to 200, 240, 300, 400, or 600 DPI in the Application Settings dialog box to match your requirements. Leave the setting at None to retain the scanned image resolution.

Starting iNAME Merge iNAME Merge uses the application file and corresponding iNAME Configuration (*.ini) file, along with the data file and image files that were created during scanning. If the iNAME configuration defined in the application is set to run iNAME Merge automatically after scanning, there are no other actions you need to perform. If you are running iNAME Merge separately after scanning, before you run it, ensure that the configured application and data paths are correct. To do this, select Paths from the Configure menu. Ensure that all the application definition items listed above are selected appropriately for the iNAME Merge process. To begin iNAME Merge manually, after scanning has been performed: 1.

Select the application and data file that were originally used for scanning the documents.

2. From the Options menu, select iNAME Merge Options to specify the data file selection option to be used for iNAME Merge. You may also choose to 164

ScanTools Plus


create backup files of the unmerged images on the iNAME Merge Options dialog. NOTE: iNAME Merge can be performed only ONCE

on a data file. If you select a data file for which iNAME Merge has already been performed, you receive an error message. If scanning and appending to a data file, do not run iNAME Merge until all scanning sessions using the data file are complete.

3. Do one of the following: • • •

Press the iNAME Merge button on the ScanTools Plus Main Window. Select iNAME Merge from the Actions menu on the ScanTools Plus Main Window. Press F8.

After iNAME Merge is run, the merged, rotated, or merged and rotated image files are stored in the directory defined in the iNAME Configuration file. Additionally, if Save a Backup of the Un-merged Images is selected in iNAME Merge Options, the un-merged image files are stored in the same base directory, using the same name as the merged images directory, but with _backup appended to the directory name.

User’s Guide

165

Chapter 8: Archiving Images Post-Scan Archiving

Post-Scan Archiving Post-scan archiving is done separately after scanning, using the data file and a corresponding .tif file that was generated during scanning. Optionally, if you have the .tif file(s) of the background of the form being scanned, it can be merged with the individual image clips, resulting in the clips positioned over the appropriate area of the form.

Application Definition for Post-Scan Archiving Before you can archive, you must create and save a ScanTools Plus application with all appropriate output fields and OMR grid/graybox/bar code definitions. The following items are needed for post-scan archiving: •

•

166

Application Settings dialog: • Enable Image for the side(s) of the sheet that contains OMR grids, grayboxes, and bar codes for which you want archive images generated. • optional — set Archive Image Scaling to 200, 240, 300, 400, or 600 DPI to match your requirements. Leave the setting at None to retain the scanned image resolution. • optional — if you are merging the background form image, and the form has the required form ID mark in the correct location and two timing marks at least four inches apart, use the OMR/ Merge Horizontal Adjustment to improve the alignment of the two images along the horizontal direction (x axis). See online help for details. Archive Indices dialog, for each document, select all fields you want available as index entries in the archive index file. These field names will then be entered into the archive index file. This is optional; if you do not do this, field names will not be in the index file.

ScanTools Plus


•

•

•

Image Clips dialog, for each sheet of each document, select the Clip Grayscale (grayscale/ bitone) choice, the Clip Compression type, and Clipping Mode of whole sheet or sparse (individual) clipping of each OMR grid/graybox/bar code. Clip Attributes dialog, for each grid for which you want an image clip file produced, under Archive, check the Archive this Clip check box, and enter a unique, meaningful File Suffix Name. The name you enter will then be used as part of the image clip file name. If you are using a background form image (see Image Clips dialog, above) and you want it merged with the individual grid clip, check Combine with Form. If you selected Sparse (individual clips) in the Image Clips dialog, you can also change the Grayscale, Compression, and other related image format parameters in each separate Clip Attributes dialog. Using this method lets you define different clip parameters for each clip. New Document or Select Document dialog, use the Add All Images or Add Image button if you have the .tif file of the background image of the form. Specify the file name under Top and Bottom Background Form Image. The name selected is displayed in the Image Clips dialog after you select it here. The background image can be merged with the individual clip, so you can view the scanned data in the context of the form.

Starting Post-Scan Archiving Post-scan archiving uses the data file and corresponding .tif file that were created during scanning. Before you archive, ensure that the configured data path is correct. To do this, select Paths from the Configure menu. To begin post-scan archiving: 1.

User’s Guide

Select the application that was originally used for scanning the documents.

167


2. From the Options menu, select Archive Options to specify the data file selection option to be used for archiving. You also specify the directory where the image files will be stored during archiving, and the index file format to be used. 3. Do one of the following: • • •

168

Press the Archive button on the ScanTools Plus main window. Select Archive from the Actions menu on the ScanTools Plus main window. Press F7.

ScanTools Plus

In this chapter: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanner Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ScanFlex Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ScanFlex Alignment Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forms Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ScanFlex/PrintFlex Guarantee. . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 169 page 171 page 172 page 173 page 174 page 175 page 176 page 177

9

Chapter 9: ScanFlex Option Overview The optional ScanFlex module is for use with image scanners only. Using a Scantron OpScan iNSIGHT 70/ 150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20, iNSIGHT 30, or OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging) scanner, ScanFlex enables you to scan OMR forms manufactured using a wide variety of printing technologies, and printed on plain paper. For example, you can print your own forms using a PostScript™ laser printer, plain paper, and Scantron DesignExpert™ software with the PrintFlex™ option. This functionality is possible because ScanFlex is able to adapt to some variations in OMR form printing. Scanning-critical form features, including timing marks, form ID marks, skew marks, and OMR responses can all vary somewhat in location from form-to-form without affecting scanning performance or data integrity. This User’s Guide

169

Chapter 9: ScanFlex Option Overview

enables less tightly defined printing tolerances that are achievable by PostScript laser printers. Instructions and tools, including the ScanFlex “Rules for Success” in online help, the ScanFlex Alignment Guide, and the Sheet Image Diagnostic, are provided to enable you to design, print, and scan forms successfully. ScanFlex requires no separate installation. When you purchase the ScanFlex option, the 14-digit license key entered for ScanTools Plus software installation automatically installs the ScanFlex option as part of the ScanTools Plus installation. When you start ScanTools Plus software, the title of the main screen is: ScanTools Plus with ScanFlex. When ScanTools Plus with ScanFlex is installed, ScanFlex is not automatically enabled. This gives you the opportunity to enable it on an application-by- application basis, as required by the forms you are using. ScanFlex is enabled in the Application Settings dialog of each ScanTools Plus application. This dialog also contains other ScanFlex options. See online help for details. Scantron guarantees forms scannability with ScanFlex providing you follow the ScanFlex Rules for Success in online help. See the ScanFlex/PrintFlex Guarantee later in this chapter for information about the terms and conditions of this guarantee.

170

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 9: ScanFlex Option Scanner Compatibility

Scanner Compatibility You can use ScanFlex with OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20, iNSIGHT 30, and OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging) image scanners. ScanFlex is not available for use with OpScan, OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (OMR only), or EZData scanners.

User’s Guide

171

Chapter 9: ScanFlex Option ScanFlex Features

ScanFlex Features •

Timing Track Location - If the timing track is printed within a defined area of the form, ScanFlex will find it and adapt to its location. • Timing Mark Height and Width - ScanFlex expects timing marks to be a consistent height and width. It can optionally be set to ignore doodling or other marks in the timing track that are not consistent with average timing mark height and width. • OMR Response Spacing - After the timing track has been located, ScanFlex locates OMR responses relative to the OMR response spacing you selected for your application. • OMR Response Scaling - ScanFlex can optionally adapt to small variations in OMR response spacing. Your form design must include a form ID mark in a designated place to use this option. • Image Clipping - If image clipping is performed, ScanFlex will automatically adjust the size of the clip area to compensate for variations in print location. • Graybox Evaluation - If grayboxes are analyzed, ScanFlex will automatically adjust the size of the evaluation area to compensate for variations in print location. This includes ICR/OCR grayboxes. • Software Bar Code Evaluation - If software bar codes are decoded, ScanFlex will automatically adjust the size of the evaluation area to compensate for variations in print location. See online help for information about implementing each feature in your form and in your ScanTools Plus application.

172

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 9: ScanFlex Option ScanFlex Alignment Guide

ScanFlex Alignment Guide An Alignment Guide is provided with ScanFlex to enable you to determine if your forms are designed and printed within ScanFlex tolerances. This clear plastic guide can be placed over your forms to check critical features before you start print production and, periodically, during print production. Using the ScanFlex Alignment Guide is an essential part of verifying that your forms are designed and printed according to the ScanFlex Rules for Success.

User’s Guide

173

Chapter 9: ScanFlex Option Forms Design

Forms Design You can use Scantron DesignExpert software to design forms. It has drawing tools and other features specifically engineered for OMR form design. In addition, it has an optional PrintFlex module that enables you to print forms for use with ScanTools Plus with ScanFlex. Other popular graphic design software can also be used to design forms although such products may not be specifically intended for OMR form design and printing.

174

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 9: ScanFlex Option Printing Forms

Printing Forms • • •

•

User’s Guide

Printing Technology - You can use a PostScript laser printer or an offset printing press to print your forms. Other printing technologies are also possible. Paper - Use white, 24# bond paper with 84 brightness. Ink - Laser printer toner (ink) is usually scanner readable. OMR forms require both scanner readable and non-readable areas. You can control whether printing is scanner readable or not by setting colors and screen percentages in your form design and by testing your printed forms. Testing Tools - In addition to the ScanFlex Alignment Guide described above, you can use the Sheet Image Diagnostic tool provided with ScanTools Plus software to verify that your printing is either scanner readable or not readable, as required, and that marks are in the correct response positions.

175

Chapter 9: ScanFlex Option Scanning

Scanning •

•

176

Background Form Images - If required for archiving and editing in your application, background form images can be merged with image clips when ScanFlex is enabled. To have the images align as well as possible, use the OMR/Merge Horizontal Adjustment in the Applications Settings of the ScanTools application. The background form image TIFF file should be supplied by the vendor who printed the form, and should be in the same orientation as the way the form is scanned. If you use Scantron DesignExpert with PrintFlex software for creating the form, you can create a background form image TIFF file using the Export Background Form Image option. If you have a file not supplied by the form vendor, it may be suitable for application definition, but might not be suitable for image archiving and editing. Powered by ScanFlex - When ScanFlex is installed and enabled in your application and you are using an OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20, iNSIGHT 30, or OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging) scanner, a “Powered by ScanFlex” pop-up message is displayed briefly every time you start a scanning session.

ScanTools Plus

Chapter 9: ScanFlex Option ScanFlex/PrintFlex Guarantee

ScanFlex/PrintFlex Guarantee (Applicable to ScanFlex licensed users ONLY) Providing You have strictly applied the ScanFlex “Rules for Success” accompanying the Program, Scantron Corporation further warrants that Scantron forms and forms printed by You or another printing vendor other than Scantron shall be scannable on Scantron image scanners for which they are designed, and shall conform to applicable specifications. Scantron Corporation reserves the right to examine all of the forms claimed to be defective or otherwise unacceptable under the above warranty, and will, in the most expeditious manner, take the necessary steps to correct any such problem. For forms printed by Scantron, Scantron shall replace any of its forms that are defective or do not otherwise meet this warranty. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the above guarantee shall be void and of no effect for in the event, (1) You print Your own forms or acquire forms from another printing vendor other than Scantron and do not strictly apply the ScanFlex Rules for Success which accompanies the Program.

User’s Guide

177

Chapter 9: ScanFlex Option ScanFlex/PrintFlex Guarantee

NOTES

178

ScanTools Plus

In this chapter: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179

10

Chapter 10: User Exits Overview User exits are fixed points in the ScanTools Plus software at which you can call and execute routines you have written. They give you an easy way to add capabilities to ScanTools Plus software. You can initiate actions during scanning that cannot be implemented using ScanTools Plus software alone; therefore, you have greater flexibility to tailor ScanTools Plus software to your applications. User exits can be used for scanning, for post-scan editing, and post-scan scoring. The following are examples of what you can perform with scanning, post-scan editing, and post-scan scoring: •

User’s Guide

Scanning • Request scanner actions that alter the normal sequence of events in the scanning cycle. 179

Chapter 10: User Exits Overview

• •

Modify buffers used by the scanner to communicate scanned information. Clip images (if using an image scanner) from scanned sheets in a variety of formats and pixel depth.

•

Post-scan editing • Modify the data to be edited and the edit error prompt before these are presented to the user. • Do special edit checks at the record or field level both before and after the data has been presented to and edited by the user. • Force a field to be skipped so a user will not see the field and optionally place data in the field (possibly from a pop-up menu of choices). • Do verification at the field or record level of the data, after it has been edited, and force the field or record to be re-edited upon failure of this verification.

•

Post-scan scoring • Modify the data to be scored prior to scoring. • Analyze the data or other information and cause the data record to not be scored. • Capture the scores generated during scoring. • Analyze the scores or other information and cause the scored record to not be written to disk.

For any User Exit development, you must have ScanTools software and you must use a C/C++ compiler that can create Windows Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs). Scantron has developed and tested User Exits using the following development platforms: •

180

Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2005 - Microsoft Visual C++ .NET. ScanTools Plus


•

Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2003 - Microsoft Visual C++ .NET • Microsoft Visual Studio v6.0 SP6 - Microsoft Visual C++. NOTE: Languages other than C/C++ are not supported in ScanTools software. User exits that were written for Image ScanTools version 4.2 or earlier will not run with ScanTools 6.0 or later. See Rebuilding User Exits in online help. During ScanTools Plus installation, you must select one (or more) of the User Exit Shell Module components to receive the required source files and Microsoft wizard files that are used for User Exit development. Separate wizard files are supplied for the Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2005, Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2003, and the Microsoft Visual Studio v6.0 environments. User Exit access within ScanTools Plus software divides scanning, editing, and scoring operations into distinct stages. Each of these processing stages has a User Exit function call assigned to it. These functions are predefined in the user exit shell code that is provided. ScanTools user exit samples can be installed as part of the Microsoft Visual Studio User Exit Shell Modules. The User Exit programmer will not be required to create the function calls applicable to these exit points. The programmer will only have to insert code relevant to the desired operation within these pre-defined User Exit functions. For a complete list of User Exits, including the name, number, function call, and brief description, refer to online help. NOTE: From inside the help system, you can print help

topics by clicking the Print button on the menu bar. If you click on a book in the help contents and then click Print, you are given the option of printing just the selected topic, or the heading and all subtopics.

NOTE: If User Exit development service is required, contact

your Scantron representative.

User’s Guide

181


NOTES

182

ScanTools Plus

In this chapter:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Output Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Document Image Format Settings in the Image Clips Window. . Defining a Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method . . . . . . . . . . . Associating a Grid with a Field using the Append Command . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Grid Using the Outline Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Clip Region for a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Clip Attributes for Post-Scan Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Date Field and the Associated Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Single Clip Region for Multiple Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Review of Field and Grid Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining and Using a Translate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Linked Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Clip Region for Linked Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Grids Using Copy and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a “Comments” Field and Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Score Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If You Need More Practice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 183 page 187 page 189 page 194 page 195 page 197 page 201 page 204 page 207 page 208 page 214 page 217 page 221 page 224 page 226 page 228 page 233 page 235 page 237 page 244 page 248 page 250 page 252

A

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Introduction This tutorial is intended to help you successfully define an image application for use with post-scan archiving, using the ScanTools Plus Application Module. In this tutorial, you will start with a form #223022 General Purpose Answer Sheet that has been designed for data collection. From there, you will define image clips, fields, grids, clip regions, translate tables, and grayboxes using the ScanTools Plus Application Module. When you are done, User’s Guide

183

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Introduction

you will have a ScanTools application that is ready to scan for data collection. This exercise is intended for use as an instructional aid for first-time users as well as a reference for experienced users. It is for use with image scanners only. WARNING: This tutorial cannot be run on OpScan OMR

only or EZData scanners.

NOTE: If you have questions about the steps you are

performing, press the F1 key on your keyboard to display context-sensitive help for the active window or dialog box.

Before You Begin • • •

• •

You should know how to use the Microsoft Windows operating system. Your scanner, utility software, and ScanTools Plus software (Application Development or Application Development with Scoring variants) must be installed. You should know the characteristics of your scanner. The tutorial applies to Scantron iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20, iNSIGHT 30, and iNSIGHT 2/4 with imaging scanners. You should give special attention to Chapter 1, “Overview” and Chapter 3, “Creating an Application” of this manual. You must have several blank copies of General Purpose Answer Sheet (GPAS) # 223022.

Form #223022 General Purpose Answer Sheet This tutorial uses the form #223022 General Purpose Answer Sheet (as shown below). This form can also be used for many real-world purposes including: •

184

Demographic information (e.g., name, birth date, identification number) ScanTools Plus


• •

Questions (100 items) used for tests, surveys, or questionnaires Collecting comments including handwritten information

801 Sample Application In the lessons that follow, you will define an application for the form #223022 General Purpose Answer Sheet. A similar application comes standard with ScanTools Plus as a sample application created by ScanTools Plus experts. User’s Guide

185


You may wish to use this ready-made application as a reference as you work on your own application. To access this ready-to-use application, perform the following: 1.

Select Scantron | ScanTools Plus from the Programs list. Doing so starts the ScanTools Plus Software and displays the ScanTools Plus main window.

2. Select Application | Select... from the menu bar. 3. Select 801 - Sample 100 Item Answer Sheet from the list box. 4. Click OK. The application loads and is ready for scanning. If you have questions during the tutorial, the 801 sample application is available for you as a reference or to check your work. The application can also be used for real-world jobs including tests, surveys, or questionnaires. NOTE: We recommend that you perform the following

lessons exactly as described in the tutorial so that the application you define through the lessons is identical to that in the 801 Sample Application.

186

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Creating a New Application

Creating a New Application Learning Objectives

In this lesson, you will: • •

Terms

Procedure

Create the new Application consistent with the 801 Sample Application. Select the appropriate Application Settings.

Application: The ScanTools file where your application definition is saved. Application files are saved in the \Applications directory (default location is C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\Applications) with an .sds suffix. An application can hold up to 255 documents. NOTE: You need to use your scanner for this procedure.

Make sure that it has been set up properly and that the power is turned on.

1.

Select Scantron | ScanTools Plus from the Programs list. This starts the ScanTools Plus software and displays the ScanTools Plus main window.

2. Select Application | New from the menu. This displays the ScanTools Plus Application Module window. 3. Select Application | Settings from the menu. The Application Settings window appears. 4. Uncheck the Release for scanning check box. An application is not ready to be released for scanning until an output format and at least one field has been defined. We will check this box in a later lesson when the application is complete. 5. Accept the defaults shown below for the Header Translation check boxes. For more information on their function, see the Including Selected Parts of the NCS Header in Your Data File help topic.

User’s Guide

187

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Creating a New Application

6. Ensure that .166 spacing (6/inch) is selected as the Read Cell Spacing in the OMR From Image group box. 7. Ensure Red (ink read) is selected as the Light Source. 8. Ensure High scan speed, low image resolution is selected as the Read Mode if you are using an OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150 or 5000i scanner. 9. Ensure For Top and Bottom or For Top Only is selected in the Enable Image group box.

10. Click OK. You have now successfully set the initial settings for your ScanTools Plus application. 188

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Creating a New Document

Creating a New Document Learning Objectives

In this lesson you will: • • •

Terms

Create a new document. Add a Background Form Image. Ensure that Background Form Image Rotation is correct.

Background Form Image: A digital representation of a printed form in .tif format. Your forms vendor typically provides this file. It is loaded into ScanTools and provides a visual representation of the form on which grids can be placed. It can also be merged with scanned data for editing and archiving purposes so that the user has a more trueto-life representation of the form. Document: One or more sheets that, when scanned, produce one document record in a data file. A document can hold up to 99 sheets. The document definition describes the document. Form ID Marks: Small black rectangles at the top of the form that uniquely identify it. ScanTools Plus requires that each sheet in an application has a unique form ID mark. Timing Marks: A column of small black rectangles that follow the guide edge of the form. Each timing mark indicates to the scanner a row in which response bubbles can be positioned.

Step 1: Checking Image Orientation Prepare for document creation by first viewing the background form image to determine the location of the timing marks. Procedure

User’s Guide

1.

Using Windows Explorer, find the background form image for this exercise that came with your ScanTools Plus software. It is in directory C:\Program

189


Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\Applications with file name 223022.tif. 2. Open the file using an imaging program (like Microsoft Paint) by selecting 223022.tif. Right click and select Open With. Select Microsoft Paint from the list by left clicking. The image will be displayed in the Paint program. Note the position of the timing marks. (They are on the left side of the image.)

You have now successfully determined the position of the timing marks in the background form image. That information will be important to you when you add the background form image to your new document in the next section.

Step 2: Creating the New Document and Adding the Background Form Image Next we need to create the document and add the background form image. Knowing the location of the

190

ScanTools Plus


timing marks is important because we will need to specify Rotation during this process. Procedure

1.

Select New from the Document menu to display the New Document dialog.

2. In the Title field, type the name of the document. For this tutorial, we will call it Learning Document. 3. In the Options section of the New Document (or Select Document if restoring the background) dialog box, click Add Image. The dialog Add Background Form Images for Sheet 1 of 1 is displayed. 4. Select the Browse... button in the Top Background Form Image area. The Specify form image file dialog opens (defaulting to the \Applications directory). 5. Select 223022f.tif from the list. Select Open to exit the dialog. You are returned to the Add Background Form Images for Sheet 1 of 1 dialog. 6. Select the appropriate Rotation button from those provided so that the timing marks will be displayed on the left side of the screen for top sheets or on the right side of the screen for bottom sheets. The image used in this tutorial is a top sheet and already has the timing marks on the left, so no rotation is necessary. Ensure that the top Rotation button is selected. NOTE: It is important that the Flip Image / Booklet

Page check box at the bottom of the application definition window is unchecked when determining proper rotation.

7. Select OK to exit the dialog. Timing mark and form ID mark locations are automatically defined from the background form image. This information is displayed in text boxes in the lower left-hand half of the dialog box.

User’s Guide

191


NOTE: The background form image for General

Purpose Answer Sheet (GPAS) 223022 is provided with ScanTools Plus software. For your applications, we recommend you have your form vendor supply background form images.

192

ScanTools Plus


8. On the New Document window, click OK. The color background form image is displayed on the right-hand side of the screen. Timing marks are displayed and numbered along the left side (guide edge) of the image viewing area. Form ID marks are displayed along the top (leading edge) in red, which indicates they have been defined for that specific location. You have now successfully created a new document and added a properly rotated background form image.

User’s Guide

193

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Creating the Output Format

Creating the Output Format Learning Objectives

In this lesson, you will: •

Create a new output format.

Terms

Output Format: The format for each record in the data file that is written to during scanning. There is typically a header field, followed by fields for the grids on the form, followed by score and totals fields.

Concept

An output record format must be created prior to defining grids on the form so that the scanned data is organized in the sequence you need.

Procedure

1.

Select New from the Output menu to display the New Output Format dialog.

2. In the Name field, type the name of the output format. For this tutorial, we will call it Learning Output Format. 3. Ensure that the Apply Output Format to current document check box is checked. If not, click the left mouse button to insert a check mark.

4. Click OK. You have now successfully created an output record format.

194

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Saving the Application

Saving the Application Learning Objectives

In this lesson you will: • •

Terms

Procedure

Give the application a name and number Save the application

Application Number: Every application is required to have a three digit number associated with it in order to ensure that it has a unique identifier. If you do not put in a number, ScanTools will select the next available number in sequence after the currently displayed application number. The Windows file name for the application is always a “z,” followed by the application number, followed by the .sds suffix (e.g. z100.sds). 1.

Select Save or Save As from the Application menu. On the first save, the Save As dialog box will appear for either command.

2. In the Save As dialog box, type in the title and number for your application. For this tutorial, in the Title field, type Learning, and in the Number field, type 100.

3. Click OK. 4. Once an application has been given a name and number using the Save As dialog box, subsequent saves can be performed by selecting Application |

User’s Guide

195

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Saving the Application

Save. This saves the application using the same name and number by overwriting the previous version. You have now successfully named and saved the application.

196

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Selecting Document Image Format Settings in the Image Clips Window

Selecting Document Image Format Settings in the Image Clips Window Learning Objectives


Terms

Learn general information regarding image clips and document image format settings. Select the proper settings to define image clips for post-scan editing and archiving.

Image Clip: Images taken from the scanned sheet so that a person editing the data can view the sheet or a part of the sheet without needing to access the paper form. Image clips can be whole sheet or parts of the sheet (sparse clipping). It is also possible to archive image clips (both during and after scanning) for various purposes. KFI (Key From Image): A post-scan editing process where the editor views the image in the editor viewer and then keys in the hand-written information into the allotted text field. Merge: When the background form image is brought together with image clips to provide the user with a realistic representation of the marked up paper form. Sparse (individual clips) Clipping mode means that images of parts of the sheet are saved. Whole Sheet Clipping mode means that an image of the whole page is saved to the master clip file.

Concept

Image clips, whether whole sheet or sparse, are stored in a single file during scanning. This file is called the master clip file. It has a .tif suffix, but cannot be viewed using normal image viewer programs because it stores multiple images. In the Image Clips window, you can select how you want the clips acquired. You can select between whole sheet or

User’s Guide

197


sparse, and also between grayscale and bitone. The storage requirements of whole sheet and grayscale images is considerably larger than part sheet and bitone. It is simply a matter of selecting the proper formats for the job. In this lesson, you will be setting parameters that will affect how the images are stored and how they appear when viewed. The settings in the Image Clips window are done on a sheet by sheet basis. Use the spinner in the top left corner of the window to select the desired sheet. Procedure

Follow the steps below to define document image format parameters: 1.

Select Document | Clips... to open the Image Clips window.

2. Fix Light Background Images: In some cases, the background .tif image does not bitone effectively when merged with a data sheet clip during the archiving process. Check the Enable Background Fix check box to enable ScanTools Plus to change the luminance of the background .tif image so that it will bitone effectively during archiving, if Bitone is selected as the Grayscale choice on the Image Clips or Clip Attributes dialogs. 3. Remove Black from Background: In some cases, when both the background image and the image clip contain non-dropout areas, an overlap area can occur making the resulting image not as clear as possible. Check the Enable Black Removal check box to remove the non-dropout black from the background form image. 4. Paper Size: While the paper size is initially set to 8500 x 11000 (non-rotated size), some forms have sizes like 8500 x 10750. Because of this, ScanTools updates the paper size directly from the background form image you add or scan in the New or Select Document dialogs. The updated dimensions are displayed in the Horizontal and Vertical fields of the Image Clips 198

ScanTools Plus


dialog. This is done automatically, but because ScanTools cannot read the dimensions of some .tif files, it is important that you check to ensure that these dimensions are correct. NOTE: If you have metric selected for your

measurement system in Control Panel | Regional and Language Options in Windows, your units will appear in MM (millimeters).

5. Background Top Form Image: The name of the top background form image file that was specified in the New Document dialog is displayed. In this case, it is 223022f.tif. You cannot change the background form image in this dialog. 6. Rotation: The rotation that was specified in the Add Background Form Image dialog is displayed. You cannot change background form image rotation in the Image Clips dialog. 7. Clipping Mode: ScanTools Plus software allows you to specify whether you want to save an image with every pixel that passes through the scanner or only those portions of the image that will be needed later either for KFI (key from image), edit correction, or archiving. See the terms section of this lesson for information on Sparse and Whole Sheet clipping. For this tutorial, select Sparse from the Clipping Mode area (this is the default). NOTE: Because you selected Sparse clipping, neither

the Clip Grayscale nor the Clip Compression group boxes are enabled in the Image Clips dialog box. These settings will be specified on the Clip Attributes dialog during grid definition. If you had selected Whole sheet, Clip Attributes

User’s Guide

199


would disable compression and grayscale options at the grid level.

8. Click Close. 9. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully set up your document for sparse clipping.

200

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining a Field

Defining a Field Learning Objectives


Terms

Define a field.

Display Field: When checked, the fields are displayed on the screen whenever a document is scanned or edited. More than one field can be defined as a display field; however, a total of 20 characters can be displayed during scanning operations. Any fields defined after the 20character limit will not appear. Field: A portion of a data record (e.g. name, birth date, ID number, etc). Every grid must correspond to a field. However, not every field has a corresponding grid. Some fields, such as score and totals fields, contain data from other sources. Fixed Length: When checked, you must enter the fixed length of the field, in characters. If you are defining grids using the OMR Tool, the length you enter must be as long as or longer than the field length. When unchecked, the length of the field is dynamically sized by ScanTools to contain the data generated by the OMR grid(s) associated with the field. Fixed length is required for the following fields: • • •

date fields evaluate fields any fields that will store total and/or subtest scores when scoring.

Grid: A set of response positions on a form that denote data collection areas. Concept

User’s Guide

When you define a field, you are setting aside space in the output record for data. A field can be alphanumeric, numeric, 1-digit, 2-digit, date, or evaluate. Most fields have 201


grids associated with them for data collection. However, some fields do not have grids associated with them. These fields can be used to store other data. A later lesson will show you how to use a field to store the Score of a test. In this lesson, you will define the Name field that will collect the first and last names as well as the middle initial of the respondents. The field will be alphanumeric. In subsequent lessons, you will learn how to define grids using two methods, and how to associate grids with the field using the Append command. Procedure

Follow the steps below to define the field in the document record: 1.

In the lower left corner of the screen, click New. The Output Field Entry dialog box is displayed.

2. In the Output Field Entry dialog box, use the following settings: • • • •

202

Name = Name. Type = Alphanumeric. In the Attributes group box, verify that Display Field is selected. Fixed Length = Blank.

ScanTools Plus


3. Click OK. The field has been defined. The next task is to define grids which will define the response positions from which data will be collected.

You have now successfully defined a field. In the next lesson, we will define a grid and then associate it with this field.

User’s Guide

203

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method

Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method Learning Objectives


Terms

Define a grid using the Background Form Image Method.

Designator: The letter, number, or symbol that can be found within a bubble. Grid: A set of response positions on a form that denote data collection areas. Mark Style: The mark style represented in the selected grid. The choices are: bubble, check box (for image scanners only), or tick mark (for image scanners only). Orientation: The direction of first response to last response.

Concept

By defining an OMR grid on the background form image, you define response positions that the scanner can evaluate as to whether they are filled in or not. The grid type (alphanumeric, numeric, etc.) should correspond to the field with which it is associated. In this lesson, you will define the grid by simply drawing it right on top of the background form image. This is the fastest and easiest method to define a grid. However, it is only possible if a background form image is available. Another method must be used if a background form image is not available (or cannot be created using a flatbed scanner). That method is covered in a later lesson.

Procedure

1.

Ensure that the desired (in this case Name) field is highlighted in the Fields list box in the lower left corner of the screen.

2. If the OMR Tool dialog box is not displayed, click the OMR button in the upper left corner of the screen.

204

ScanTools Plus


NOTE: The OMR button may appear as the following

image, depending on your settings in Configure | Preferences...:

3. In the OMR Tool dialog, use the following settings: • • • • •

Type = Alphabetic, no space Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1 Orientation = Down

4. Move the mouse pointer to the upper left corner of the Last Name grid. Start at the “A” and not at the “write-in” boxes. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer to the lower right corner of the Last Name grid. Now release the mouse button. The grid designators will appear blue over the red-orange designators visible in the background form image. Your grid should look like the illustration shown on the next page.

User’s Guide

205


NOTE: If you make a mistake, click the Undo Grid

Definition button; then, try again.

You have now successfully drawn the Last Name grid. The designators should align with those visible in the background form image. The arrow shown in the grid indicates the grid data order.

206

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Associating a Grid with a Field using the Append Command

Associating a Grid with a Field using the Append Command Learning Objectives

In this lesson you will: •

Concept

Associate a grid with a field using the Append command.

Once the field and grid have been defined, it is necessary to “associate” the two by appending the grid to the field. This is done through the Append command. Once associated, data collected from the grid response positions is stored in the associated field. Once a grid has been defined, it must be appended to a field. If you go to another task without appending, the grid definition is lost. NOTE: You can append multiple grids to a single field. Data

is collected in the same order as the grids are listed, so it is important to properly position the grids within the list. If necessary, you can drag the grids up and down in the grid list to the desired location after appending.

Procedure

1.

Once the grid has been drawn, ensure that the field you want to associate to is highlighted in the Fields list.

2. Click Append to associate the grid with the field. 3. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully associated a grid with a field.

User’s Guide

207

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining a Grid Using the Outline Method

Defining a Grid Using the Outline Method Learning Objectives

In this lesson you will: • • • •

Concept

Outline a grid region on a blank form to help you place your grid. Scan the form to use as a background form image for application development only. Define the grid using the outline as a guide. Restore the 223022.tif background form image for use in the remaining lessons.

If you do not have a background form image, you can scan a form to use as a background form image. There are two disadvantages with this method as compared to getting a background form image from your forms vendor: • •

The dropout colors will not be visible. This means that the form’s bubbles and designators will not be visible so that you can easily place your grids. The scanned background is not suitable for a background form merge used in editing and archiving.

If you can live with the above disadvantages, the Outline Method for grid definition allows for quick application development. In this lesson, you will be outlining a single grid for the sake of the lesson. However, if you were actually creating an application for a form, you would find it most efficient to outline all the grids on the form prior to scanning it. That way, you could define each of the grids without having to rescan the image. NOTE: The grid you defined in “Defining a Grid Using the

Background Form Image Method” on page 204 will be present on your scanned background form image. Please ignore it for this lesson and focus on the First Name and M (middle initial) grids.

208

ScanTools Plus


Step 1: Outlining the Grid Region and Scanning the Form In this section, you will outline the grid region on the form so that you can later define the grid using the OMR Tool. You will also scan the form to use as a background form image for application development only. Procedure

1.

On a blank General Purpose Answer Sheet (form number 223022), use a pen or pencil (pencil reads well when the light source is set to red (ink)) to draw an outline around the First Name and M grids. Do not include the write-in area at the top.

2. From the Application Module window, select Document | Select... from the menu. The Select Document window will appear. 3. Click the Scan Sheet button. A message box asking if you want to replace the existing background form image will appear. 4. Click Yes. The sheet is scanned. Timing mark and Form ID mark data is updated in the Select Document window.

User’s Guide

209


5. Click OK in the Select Document window. The scanned form is displayed and the dropout colors are not visible.

6. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully scanned a sheet to use as a background form image for application development only. In the next lesson, you will place a grid inside the outline that you just created. NOTE: The scanned background form image can be used

for placing grids, but not for merging, editing, or archiving.

210

ScanTools Plus


Step 2: Defining a Grid Using the Outline Method In this section, you will define a grid inside the outline that you created in the previous section. Procedure

1.


2. If the OMR Tool dialog box is not displayed, click the OMR button in the upper left corner of the screen. NOTE: The OMR button may appear as the following

image, depending on your settings in Configure | Preferences...:

3. In the OMR Tool dialog, use the following settings: • • • • •

Type = Alphabetic, no space Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1 Orientation = Down

4. Draw a grid inside the outline that you created in the previous section. Ensure that your grid is 12 characters wide and that you see designators for A through Z. Your grid should look like the illustration shown below.

User’s Guide

211




5. Associate the First Name and M (middle initial) grid with the Name field by clicking the Append button. When you have done this, you will have two grids associated with the Name field. 6. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully defined a grid using the Outline Method and associated that grid with a field. Next you will do some clean-up before moving on to the next lesson.

212

ScanTools Plus


Step 3: Restoring the 223022.tif Background Form Image Procedure

Next, you will re-load the background form image provided with your ScanTools Plus software so that you can define grids using the Background Form Image Method in the remaining lessons. 1.

In the Application Module window, select Document | Select from the menu. The Select Document window appears.

2. Re-load the background form image as described in steps 3 to 10 of “Step 2: Creating the New Document and Adding the Background Form Image” on page 190. NOTE: If you have a dual read head scanner, you will

find that there are names for the top and bottom background form images shown in the text boxes of the Replace Background Form Image dialog box. These names were created automatically when you scanned the sheet. You can delete the name of the Bottom Background Form Image if you desire. However, if you do not, it will not adversely affect the remainder of the lessons.

3. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully restored the background form image and are ready to go to the next lesson.

User’s Guide

213

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining the Clip Region for a Grid

Defining the Clip Region for a Grid Learning Objectives


Terms

Concept

Learn what a clip region is. Learn two methods for defining a clip region associated with a grid.

Clip Region: For image scanners only, the area on the form that will be archived or displayed in the post-scan editor. For image scanners only, ScanTools creates an image clip region associated with every grid. By default, the clip region and the grid coincide. However, it is often advantageous to include hand-print areas in the clip region. This is easily accomplished by expanding the clip region. While not as common, it is also possible for the clip region to be in a completely unrelated part of the form as the grid. As part of this lesson, we also cover how to do that. ScanTools Plus has default settings for the image clips that are acquired. However, it is a good idea to go through the settings and optimize them for your purposes. We will do that in the next lesson.

Procedure

1.

Set the Zoom Level control so that the entire grids for Last Name and First Name and M (Middle Initial) are visible in the screen.

2. Click on the Last Name grid to select it. It will turn blue indicating that it is the active grid. (Notice that the Name field and the 14 character grid are highlighted in the lower left corner of the screen.) 3. Click the Edit Selected Grid button in the OMR Tool dialog. The grid will turn a bright blue indicating that it is ready for editing. 214

ScanTools Plus


4. Next, you will enlarge the clip region for the Last Name grid to include the handprint boxes above the bubbles. To do this, place the cursor over the top grid line and click and drag while pressing the Ctrl key. When the grid outline is where you want it, release the left mouse button and the Ctrl key. If you make a mistake, simply try again. NOTE: The clip region can also be defined in an area

completely separate from the grid. To do this, press the Ctrl key, then click and drag a box anywhere on the form. The resulting clip area is still associated with the highlighted grid for editing purposes.

5. Associate the grid and enlarged clip region with the field by clicking Replace in the lower left corner of the screen. User’s Guide

215


NOTE: The Append button label changes to Replace

when editing grids. While the name is different, they do essentially the same thing.

6. Enlarge the clip region for First Name and M (Middle Initial) using the same method as described in steps 2 through 5 except begin by selecting the First Name and M grid. You have now successfully re-defined the clip regions for the two grids.

216

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Setting Clip Attributes for Post-Scan Archiving

Setting Clip Attributes for Post-Scan Archiving Learning Objectives


Terms

Select the appropriate settings for post-scan archiving using the Clip Attributes window.

Bitone: An image with only two shades: black and white. Grayscale: An image with up to 256 shades of gray. Grayscale images have the advantage of being clearer than bitone images but have the disadvantage of having larger file sizes. Post-Scan Image Archiving: The process of archiving images that were saved in the master clip file during scanning. Post-scan archiving takes images from the master clip file and saves them to individual files with unique names so that they can be viewed with standard imaging software.

Concept

ScanTools Plus has default settings for the image clips that are acquired. However, it is a good idea to go through the settings and optimize them for your purposes. Short explanations of the various settings are provided in the procedure below. For more detailed information consult Chapter 8 of the User’s Guide or online Help.

Procedure

NOTE: Setting clip attributes is best done at the time you

originally define a grid. However, for the purposes of this tutorial, we are showing you how to go back and edit the clip attributes.

1.

Select the Last Name grid by clicking on it. It will turn blue indicating that you have selected it.

2. In the OMR Tool dialog box, click the Edit Selected Grid button. The grid will turn bright blue.

User’s Guide

217


NOTE: It is important to click Edit Selected Grid

before making changes to the clip attributes. If you do not, your changes will not be saved.

3. Click the Clip Attributes button in the OMR Tool dialog. 4. In the Grayscale area, select Bitone (this will keep file size to a minumum). 5. Ensure that the top radio button is selected in the Rotation area because no rotation is needed. 6. Select the CCITT G4 Fax radio button for compression. NOTE: For Bitone compression, we recommend you

select CCITT Group 4 Fax. For Grayscale compression, we recommend you select RLE Packbits. See online help for additional information.

7. Select Archive this Clip to post-scan archive the current image clip. 8. Select Combine with Form to combine the background form image with the clip in the archive file. Archiving the background form image with the clip can make certain clips more readable and provides context for the responses.

218

ScanTools Plus


9. In the File Name Suffix field, type LastName for the suffix to be assigned to the archive file during scanning.

10. Click OK. 11. Save the Clip Attributes settings by clicking Replace in the lower left corner of the screen. 12. Select the First Name and M grid and repeat steps 2 through 12 (above) to select the proper settings for

User’s Guide

219


post-scan archiving. For step 9, use FirstNameM for the File Name Suffix. 13. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully set the clip attributes for the Last Name and First Name and M grids.

220

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining a Date Field and the Associated Grids

Defining a Date Field and the Associated Grids Learning Objectives


Terms

Learn how to collect date data using one field and five grids. Associate grids of different types with a single field with a Date type.

Two Digit Response: A grid type that uses the decimal characters 01 through 99. Fixed Length: When checked, you must enter the fixed length of the field, in characters. If you are defining grids using the OMR Tool, the length you enter must be as long as or longer than the field length generated by ScanTools from the associated grids. When unchecked, the length of the field is dynamically sized by ScanTools to contain the data generated by the OMR grid(s) associated with the field. Fixed length is required for the following fields: • • •

Concept

We will use the five grids listed below to collect data for the field Birth Date. These grids will be associated with a single field named Birth Date that is 8 characters long and of type Date. All five grids will appear under the BIRTH DATE data area on the General Purpose Answer Sheet (form #223022). • •

User’s Guide


The grid for month (MO) will be defined as a two-digit response grid. (A single row of bubbles will represent the digits 01 to 12.) The first digit of the Day grid will be defined as a numeric grid (0 to 3). 221


• • • Procedure

1.

The second digit of the Day grid will be defined as a numeric grid (0 to 9). The first digit of the Year grid will be defined as a numeric grid (0 to 2). The last three digits of the Year grid will be defined as a numeric grid (0 to 9). Define a field called Birth Date as described in “Defining a Field” on page 201. Use the following settings: • • • •

Name = Birth Date. Type = Date. In the Attributes field, be sure no boxes are checked. In the Fixed Length field, click the box to insert a check mark; type 8.

2. Define grid 1 as described in “Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method” on page 204. In the OMR Tool, use the following settings: • • • • •

Type = Two-digit response Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1 Orientation = Down

3. Click Append to associate grid 1 with the Birth Date field. 4. Define grids 2 through 5 as described in “Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method” on page 204. Click Append after defining each grid. In the OMR Tool, use the following settings for each of the grids: 222

ScanTools Plus


• • • • •

Type = Numeric Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1 Orientation = Down

5. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully defined the Birth Date field complete with associated grids. However, we have not yet defined the clip region. That is covered in the next lesson.

User’s Guide

223

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining a Single Clip Region for Multiple Grids

Defining a Single Clip Region for Multiple Grids Learning Objectives


Concept

Define a single clip region for a five grid data area.

For this tutorial, one of the data areas that we would like to post-scan archive is the BIRTH DATE data area. However, this field has five grids associated with it. Rather than archiving five clip regions, we will set up only the last grid for post-scan archiving. The other grids we will leave with their default clip region settings. NOTE: Even though we are setting up a single clip region

for post-scan archiving, the clip region for each individual grid will appear during post-scan editing.

Procedure

1.

Scroll and adjust the Zoom Level so that the entire BIRTH DATE data area is visible.

2. Click on the grid defining the last three digits of the year. 3. Click Edit Selected Grid.

224

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining a Single Clip Region for Multiple Grids

4. While holding the Ctrl key, drag the top and left grid lines so that the entire BIRTH DATE data area is included in the clip region.

5. Click the Clip Attributes button to display the Clip Attributes dialog box. Select settings consistent with those used earlier in “Setting Clip Attributes for Post-Scan Archiving” on page 217. Use the name BirthDate for the File Name Suffix in step 9. Click OK when done. 6. Click the Replace button in the lower left corner of the screen. 7. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully define a single clip region that covers a five grid data area.

User’s Guide

225

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Review of Field and Grid Definition

Review of Field and Grid Definition Learning Objectives


Concept

Procedure

Add an ID Number field and grid.

This lesson is used to add the ID Number field and grid so that your application is consistent with the General Purpose Answer Sheet and the 801 Sample Application. This lesson is review and covers no new material. 1.

Define the ID Number field by clicking New in the lower left corner of the screen. In the Output Field Entry dialog, use the following settings: • • • •

Name = ID Number Type = Numeric No boxes should be checked in Attributes. Fixed Length = Blank

2. Click OK. 3. Define the grid as described in “Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method” on page 204. In the OMR Tool, use the following settings: • • • • •

Type = Numeric Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1 Orientation = Down

NOTE: The 801 Sample Application does not have the

clip region enlarged to include the hand-print area

226

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Review of Field and Grid Definition

so we will leave the clip region as defined by default in this lesson.

4. Click the Append button in the lower left corner of the screen. 5. Select Application | Save to save the application. 6. You have now successfully add the ID Number field and grid to make your application consistent with the 801 Sample Application.

User’s Guide

227

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining and Using a Translate Table

Defining and Using a Translate Table Learning Objectives


Create a translate table. Define a field and grid using a user-defined data type.

Terms

Translate Table: A table used to store values for a user defined data type. For example, the translate table for the type Gender that we will use in this lesson includes Female and Male.

Concept

The Gender grid offers the respondent two choices, F or M. Marking one or the other writes the words Female or Male to the data record. Since Gender is not a standard data type available in ScanTools Plus software, you will need to create a custom data type by using a translate table.

Step 1: Defining a Translate Table Procedure

1.

In the upper left corner of the screen, click the Translate button. The Translate Tool dialog box is displayed. NOTE: The Translate button may appear as the

following image, depending on your settings in Configure | Preferences...:

2. Click the Add Table button in the top part of the dialog box. The Add Translate Table dialog box is displayed.

228

ScanTools Plus


3. Type the name of the table in the Name field. For this tutorial, type Gender.

4. Click OK to close the Add Translate Table dialog box. 5. At the bottom of the Translate tool dialog box, click the Add Entry button. The Translate Table Entry dialog box is displayed. NOTE: For an explanation of the Omit and Multiple

responses, consult the online Help system.

6. The Response Position field is prefilled with 1, indicating that you are about to enter the character or string to assign to the first bubble in the grid. In the Translate String: field, type Female. 7. Click OK. 8. Click the Add Entry button again. The Translate Table Entry dialog box is displayed. 9. Now the Response Position field is prefilled with 2, indicating that you are about to enter the character or string to assign to the second bubble in the grid. In the Translate String field, type Male.

User’s Guide

229


10. Click OK.

11. At the bottom of the Translate tool dialog box, click the Close button. You have now successfully created a translate table of type Gender. Gender will now be available in the Type drop-down list in the OMR Tool for every document in the application.

Step 2: Using a Translate Table When Defining a Field and Grid Procedure

230

Use the following steps to define the Gender field, grid, and clip region in the document record:

ScanTools Plus


1.

Define the field as described in “Defining a Field” on page 201. Use the following settings in the Output Field Entry dialog box: • • • •

Name = Gender. Type = Alphanumeric. No boxes should be checked in Attributes. Fixed Length = Blank.

2. Click OK. 3. Define the grid as described in “Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method” on page 204. Use the following settings in the OMR Tool: • • • • •

Type = Gender Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1 Orientation = Down

4. Click the Clip Attributes button to display the Clip Attributes dialog box. Select settings consistent with those used earlier in “Setting Clip Attributes for Post-Scan Archiving” on page 217. Use the name Gender for the File Name Suffix in step 9. Click OK when done. 5. Click the Append button in the lower left corner of the screen to define the grid and clip attributes.

User’s Guide

231


NOTE: Notice that the grid width in the Grids list is “6.”

This is to accommodate the longest string which is Female.

6. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully defined a grid for a userdefined data type.

232

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining Linked Grids

Defining Linked Grids Learning Objectives


Terms Concept

Procedure

Define a field for Education using the technique learned in “Defining a Field” on page 201. Learn how to define a linked grid for the two-columns of responses.

Linked Grids: Two or more separate grids that have a continued set of response designators between them. In some cases, there is not enough room to put all responses for a question in a single column or row. When this occurs, use a linked grid to continue the responses from one grid to the next. 1.

Define the Education field as described in “Defining a Field” on page 201. In the Output Field Entry dialog box, use the following settings: • • • •

Name = Education. Type = Numeric. No boxes should be checked in Attributes. Fixed Length = Blank.

2. Click OK. 3. Define the Education grid by first ensuring that the field name is highlighted in the box in the lower left corner of the screen. 4. If the OMR Tool dialog box is not displayed, click the OMR Tool in the upper left corner of the screen. 5. In the OMR Tool dialog box, use the following settings: • User’s Guide

Type = Two-digit response 233

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining Linked Grids

• • • •

Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1 Orientation = Down

6. Draw the first grid on top of the left column for the GRADE or EDUCATION data area. The numbers 1 through 8 will be placed. 7. In the OMR Tool dialog box, click the Add Link to Grid button. Use the same settings as step 5 above for the second grid. 8. Draw the second grid on top of the right column in the GRADE or EDUCATION data area. The numbers 9 through 16 (although the “1” for the tens digit will not appear) will be placed.

9. Associate the linked grids with the Education field by clicking Append in the lower left corner of the screen. 10. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successful defined linked grids and associated them with a field that you defined.

234

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining a Clip Region for Linked Grids

Defining a Clip Region for Linked Grids Learning Objectives

In this lesson, you will: • • •

Concept

Learn about clip regions associated with linked grids. Define a clip region for two grids that are linked. Learn that you cannot edit linked grids.

The linked grids in this lesson are different from the multiple grids that we saw in “Defining a Single Clip Region for Multiple Grids” on page 224. Linked grids have only a single clip region that is associated with the last grid placed. In the case of the multiple grids that were placed in “Review of Field and Grid Definition” on page 226, each of the five grids placed still had a clip region associated with it. Although linked grids and multiple grids differ in this way, we will treat them similarly in this tutorial. We will use the last field placed to define the clip region for the entire data area. In other words, we will expand the clip region for the last field placed so that it also covers the other grid that is linked. Another trait of linked grids is that they cannot be edited. This means that if you realize that you’ve made a mistake (or more likely that you forgot to expand the clip region) after clicking Append, you will need to Cut the grids, then re-define them. In this lesson, we will Cut (delete) the grids, then re-define them using the techniques learned in Lesson “Defining Linked Grids” on page 233. Finally, we will define the clip region before clicking Append.

Procedure

1.

Scroll and adjust the Zoom Level so that the entire GRADE or EDUCATION data area is visible.

2. Click on either of the two grids for GRADE or EDUCATION to highlight both grids.

User’s Guide

235

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining a Clip Region for Linked Grids

3. Click Cut in the lower left corner of the screen to remove both grids. 4. Re-define the two grids using the same procedure as in steps 3 through 8 of “Defining Linked Grids” on page 233, but do not click Append. (If you accidentally click Append, you will need to go back to step 2 of this lesson because linked grids cannot be edited). 5. The next step is to define the clip region. For this lesson, we will define the clip region from scratch rather than enlarging the existing clip region of the last grid defined. While holding the Ctrl key, draw a box that outlines the entire GRADE or EDUCATION data area. This sets the clip region for the last linked grid defined.

6. Click the Clip Attributes button to display the Clip Attributes dialog box. Select settings consistent with those used earlier in “Setting Clip Attributes for Post-Scan Archiving” on page 217. Use the name Education for the File Name Suffix in step 9. Click OK when done. 7. Click the Append button in the lower left corner of the screen. 8. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully defined a clip region for two linked grids. 236

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining Grids Using Copy and Paste

Defining Grids Using Copy and Paste Learning Objectives

In this lesson you will: Use Copy and Paste to define grids for the Part One and Part Two fields.

Terms

Clipboard: A place in your computer’s memory that an item can be copied to and pasted from. Ctrl+C: The keyboard shortcut for the Copy command. Copy a grid to the Clipboard by typing a “c” while holding the Ctrl key. Ctrl+V: The keyboard shortcut for the Paste command. Paste a grid from the Clipboard by typing a “v” while holding the Ctrl key.

Concept

The Clipboard is a Windows feature that can be used in many Windows programs including ScanTools Plus. When you have multiple grids that are the same size, you can save time in defining them by copying, pasting, and repositioning. If you are careful about highlighting the correct field in the fields list, you can even copy grids from one field to another field. We will do just that in this lesson. Another time saver in copying and pasting grids is that all Clip Attribute settings are copied except for Archive this Clip and the File Name Suffix (naturally, these need to be defined for each grid). Just be sure to have the proper settings selected on the original, before copying and pasting.

Step 1: Defining the Two Fields Procedure

User’s Guide

1.

In the lower left corner of the screen, click the New button. The Output Field Entry dialog box is displayed.

237



Name = Part One Type = 1-Digit No boxes should be checked in Attributes. Fixed Length = Blank

3. Click OK. 4. To create the field Part Two, repeat the procedure (steps 1 through 3), but name the field Part Two. You have now successfully defined the fields Part One and Part Two.

Step 2: Defining the Two Grids That Will Be Copied: Procedure

1.

Select (highlight) the Part One field.

2. If the OMR Tool dialog box is not displayed, click the OMR Tool in the upper left corner of the screen. 3. In the OMR Tool, use the following settings: • • • • •

Type = Alphabetic, no space Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1 Orientation = Right

4. Draw the grid on response positions 1 through 16 using the technique learned in “Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method” on page 204.

238

ScanTools Plus


5. The next step is to set the clip attributes. We will not be setting these grids up for post-scan archiving. However, we do want the clip regions visible for editing. Click the Clip Attributes button. Use the following settings for proper viewing in the editor and to help keep the size of the master clip file small: • • • • •

Grayscale = Bitone Compression = CCITT G4 Fax Rotation = Up Dynamic Threshold Data Type for Bitone Clips = Mixed/Handprint (This is the most flexible type.) Bitone Edge Contrast Enhancement = Checked (To remove shadows around dark areas.)

NOTE: For more information on specific topics such as

Dynamic Threshold Data Type for Bitone Clips or Bitone Edge Contrast Enhancement, consult the online Help system.

6. Click OK. 7. Click Append to associate the grid with the Part One field.

User’s Guide

239


8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for the second grid which covers response positions 17 through 33.

9. Select Application | Save to save your work. You now have successfully defined the two grids that will be copied complete with clip attribute settings. Next you will copy these grids to other locations on the form and to multiple fields.

Step 3: Copying and Pasting Grids to Other Positions and to Multiple Fields Procedure

1.

Click on the second grid (response positions 17 through 33) to highlight the grid.

2. Click the Copy button or press Ctrl+c. The grid is now no longer highlighted. 240

ScanTools Plus


3. Ensure that the Part One field in the fields list and the second grid in the grids list are both highlighted. 4. Next, click the Paste button or press Ctrl+v. The grid over response positions 17 through 35 will turn pink. This indicates that a grid has been pasted into that position. 5. Click and hold down the left mouse button in the center of the grid. Drag the grid so that it is positioned directly over response positions 34 through 50 and then release the mouse button. If you make a mistake, simply click and drag until the grid is properly positioned.

6. Click Append to associate the grid with the Part One field.

User’s Guide

241


You have now successfully defined the grid for positions 34 through 50 complete with clip attributes. Next, we will place the grid for positions 51 through 66. Remember, this grid needs to be associated with the Part Two field. 7. Click on the grid over response positions 1 through 16. The grid will be highlighted. In addition, notice that the Part One field in the fields list and the first grid in the grids list are also highlighted. 8. Click the Copy button to copy the grid to the clipboard. The grid is no longer highlighted. 9. Before we paste, it is important to highlight the correct field. Click on the Part Two field in the fields list. Notice that there are no grids in the grids list. 10. Click the Paste button to paste the grid over response positions 1 through 16. 11. Click and drag the grid that you just pasted to the proper position over response positions 51 through 66. 12. Click Append to associate the grid with the Part Two field. You have now successfully copied a grid from one field and pasted it to a different field. In the steps that follow, we will do that two more times to complete grid placement for the Part One and Part Two fields. 13. Click on the grid over response positions 17 through 33. 14. Click the Copy button to copy the grid. 15. Click on the Part Two field to ensure that the grids will be appended to the correct field. 16. Click Paste, then drag the grid to the appropriate position over response positions 67 through 83. 242

ScanTools Plus


17. Click Append to associate the grid with the Part Two field. NOTE: The grid is still on the clipboard, so there is no

need to copy the grid a second time.

18. Click Paste, then drag the grid to the appropriate position over response positions 84 through 100. 19. Click Append to associate the grid with the Part Two field.

20. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully defined and associated all grids with the Part One and Part Two fields.

User’s Guide

243

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining a “Comments” Field and Grid

Defining a “Comments” Field and Grid Learning Objectives


Terms

Define a field for write-in comments. Define a graybox grid. Select the appropriate clip attributes.

Graybox (standard): A defined region of a form that is evaluated for the presence of data. If there is data, the clip is stored in the master clip file. The resulting images can be viewed during post-scan editing or they can be archived with unique file names. KFI (Key From Image): A post-scan editing process where the editor views the image in the editor viewer and then keys the hand-written information into the allotted text field.

Concept

Grayboxes are most often used to collect hand print data from forms. They are often used with the comments section. A common post-scan activity is KFI editing, where the image is displayed in the viewer, and the editor types the hand-written response into the field provided. Grayboxes can also be used with the optional Real Time character recognition module, although a discussion of those topics is beyond the scope of this tutorial. In this lesson, you will define the field and grid, then select the appropriate graybox and clip attribute settings.

Step 1: Defining the Field Procedure

1.


2. In the Output Field Entry, use the following settings: • 244

Name = Comments ScanTools Plus


• • •

Type = Alphanumeric. No boxes should be checked in Attributes. The Fixed Length check box must be checked and the length of the field equal to or greater than the number of characters specified in the output length field on the Graybox tool -- in this case 99.

3. Click the OK button. You have now successfully defined the field that will store the data for the Comments grid.

Step 2: Defining the Grid and Selecting the Clip Attributes Procedure

In this procedure, we will be defining the grid and setting up the grid for post-scan archiving. 1.

Click the Graybox button in the upper left corner of the screen. NOTE: The Graybox button may appear as the

following image, depending on your settings in Configure | Preferences...:

2. Set the Cutoff Value to 5. With this setting, ScanTools will consider any mark with a mark read value equal to or greater than 5 as data and will save the grid region to the master clip file. If no marks equal to or greater than 5 are present, no image will be saved. 3. Set the Output Length value to 99. This sets the number of characters reserved in the output record for the data derived from the graybox grid. With this value set to 99, the editor will be able to type up to 99 characters into the field during post-scan editing.

User’s Guide

245


4. Leave the Enable Conditional Clipping for Image Archiving check box unchecked because we will be archiving a Comments grid for each form scanned. If it was checked, archiving would occur only for those grayboxes with marks in them. 5. In the Unit of Measurement list box, select Cell, Timing Mark.

6. Click the Clip Attributes button to display the Clip Attributes dialog box. Select settings consistent with those used earlier in “Setting Clip Attributes for Post-Scan Archiving” on page 217. Use the name Comments for the File Name Suffix in step 9. Click OK when done. 7. Move the mouse pointer to the upper left corner of the grid; hold the left button down; drag the pointer to the lower right corner; and release the mouse button. NOTE: Notice in the illustration below, that the graybox

is drawn below the word “- Comments -”. This

246

ScanTools Plus


was done intentionally so that the title of the box is not interpreted as marks within the box.

8. Click the Append button in the lower left corner of the screen to associate the grid with the Comments field. 9. Select Application | Save from the menu to save your work. You have now successfully defined a Comments field and associated a graybox grid with it. When marks with a value equal to or greater than 5 appear in the box, an image of the graybox grid will be saved to the master clip file. NOTE: If desired, the saved images could also be used for

post-scan editing or ICR/OCR processing.

User’s Guide

247

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining a Score Field

Defining a Score Field Learning Objectives


Terms

Define a field for the Score of the General Purpose Answer Sheet

1- or 2- Digit Field Data Types: 1- or 2-Digit field data types are required for items that will be scored. The items to be scored must also be marked on the associated key sheet. If you specify 1- or 2-Digit field data type for items you do not wish to score, do not mark these items on a key sheet. Score: A number associated with the number of responses on a scanned form that match the answer key.

Concept

Up to this point, every field we created in the Output Record has had one or more grids associated with it. However, in this lesson, we will create a field that does not have a grid associated with it. Instead, we will use the field to store the value of the score of scanned forms. Scoring can be done online, or as a post-scan activity that is accessed through the main ScanTools window. The ScanTools score module allows you to score multiplechoice and true/false tests through the use of 1- or 2- digit field data types. Scoring consists of determining correct and incorrect responses by comparing the test data to key data. The key data can be stored in the profile, or can be scanned online. The actual scoring process is beyond the scope of this tutorial. The following describes how to set up the Score field. 1.

248


ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Defining a Score Field


Name = Score Type = Numeric. No boxes should be checked in Attributes. Fixed Length = 6 for this example. A total score requires a minimum of 5, and a subtest score requires a minimum of 4.

3. Click OK. Score* is displayed in the field list in the lower left corner. The asterisk indicates that it is a field with no grids associated with it.

4. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have just successfully defined a field to store score data.

User’s Guide

249

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application

Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application Learning Objectives


Concept

Procedure

Ready your application for scanning by checking Release for Scanning Exit the Application Module. Save your work on a removable media by creating an application diskette.

In this lesson, we will wrap up application definition. The fields for the data file have been created. The grids have been placed and associated with the appropriate fields. Clip regions have been defined for both post-scan editing and image archiving. All that remains is to release the application for scanning, and to save the application to a removable media for archiving, to move to a different computer, or for distribution. 1.

When all fields and grids are defined, your application is ready to be released for scanning. To do this, select Application | Settings. The Application Settings window is displayed.

2. Check the Release for scanning check box so that the application can be scanned. 3. Click OK to continue. You are returned to the Application Module. 4. Select Application | Exit to exit the Application Module. 5. To save your application, select Configure | Make Application Disk.... The Make Application Disk dialog box appears. 6. Highlight your new application by selecting 100 Learning Document.

250

ScanTools Plus

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application

7. To save all components of your application, check all boxes in the Copy Input/Configuration Files of Type and the Copy Output/Produced Files of Type groups. 8. In the Copy To text box, enter the drive letter and directory that you wish to copy the application to. 9. Click OK to continue. The Copy Application Files dialog box appears. 10. Hold down the Ctrl key, then click to highlight those files that you would like copied to the drive and directory you chose in step 8. (We recommend copying them all.) To de-select a file, simply click on it again while holding the Ctrl key. 11. When you have selected the files you wish to copy, click the Copy button to copy the files. You have now successfully released your application for scanning and saved your application to disk. That concludes this tutorial.

User’s Guide

251

Appendix A: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an Image Scanner If You Need More Practice

If You Need More Practice Talk with your Scantron representative about additional training services and materials available or visit our Web site at www.scantron.com. Custom application development is available through the Scantron Services Group by calling 1-800-338-5544.

252

ScanTools Plus

In this chapter:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the 701 Sample Application as a Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Output Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method . . . . . . . . . . . Associating a Grid with a Field using the Append Command . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Grid Using the Corners Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Date Field and the Associated Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining and Using a Translate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Linked Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Grids Using Copy and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Score Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If You Need More Practice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 253 page 257 page 264 page 265 page 270 page 271 page 273 page 276 page 279 page 280 page 287 page 290 page 294 page 296 page 304 page 306 page 308

B

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Introduction This tutorial is intended to help you successfully define an OMR application using the ScanTools Plus Application Module. In this tutorial, you will start with a General Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681 that has been designed for data collection. From there, you will define fields, grids, and translate tables using the ScanTools Plus Application Module. When you are done, you will have a ScanTools application that is ready to scan for data collection. This exercise is intended for use as an instructional aid for first-time users as well as a reference for experienced users. It is for use with OMR scanners only. User’s Guide

253

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Introduction

WARNING: This tutorial cannot be run on EZData scanners. NOTE: If you have questions about the steps you are

performing, press the F1 key on your keyboard to display context-sensitive help for the active window or dialog box.

Before You Begin • • • • •

You should know how to use the Microsoft Windows operating system. Your scanner, utility software, and ScanTools Plus software (Application Development or Application Development with Scoring variants) must be installed. You should know the characteristics of your scanner. This tutorial applies to Scantron iNSIGHT 2/4 OMR only scanners and OpScan OMR Scanners. You should give special attention to Chapter 1, “Overview” and Chapter 3, “Creating an Application” of this manual. You must have several blank copies of General Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681 (that came with your ScanTools Plus software).

General Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681 This tutorial uses the General Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681 (as shown below). This two-sided form can also be used for many real-world purposes including:

254

ScanTools Plus


• •

User’s Guide

Demographic information (e.g., name, birth date, identification number) or Questions (200 items) used for tests, surveys, or questionnaires

255


256

ScanTools Plus

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Preparing the 701 Sample Application as a Reference

Preparing the 701 Sample Application as a Reference In the lessons that follow this one, you will define from scratch an application for the General Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681. A similar, ready made application created by ScanTools experts comes standard with ScanTools Plus. In this lesson we will prepare this completed sample application so that you can use it as a reference while you are working on the tutorial application. Learning Objectives

In this lesson, you will: • • • •

Terms

Select the 701 Sample Application using ScanTools Plus Migrate the application to ScanTools Plus. (It was originally a ScanTools for Windows application and must be updated to the new format.) Select the correct document within the 701 application Add background form images to make the application more user-friendly

Application: The ScanTools file where your application definition is saved. Application files are saved in the \Applications directory (default location is C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\Applications) with an .sds suffix. An application can hold up to 255 documents. Background Form Image: A digital representation of a printed form in .tif format. Your forms vendor typically provides this file. It is loaded into ScanTools Plus and provides a visual representation of the form on which grids can be placed. It can also be merged with scanned data for editing and archiving purposes so that the user has a more true-to-life representation of the form. Document: One or more sheets that, when scanned, produce one document record in a data file. A document

User’s Guide

257


can hold up to 99 sheets. The document definition describes the document.

Step 1: Selecting the 701 Sample Application Procedure

To select this completed application, perform the following: 1.

Select Scantron | ScanTools Plus from the Programs list. Doing so starts the ScanTools Plus software and displays the ScanTools Plus main window.

2. Select Application | Select... from the menu bar. 3. Select 701 - Sample Application from the list box. 4. Click OK. The application is selected but is not yet ready for use as a reference. First you must migrate the application, select the correct document, and add the background form images.

258

ScanTools Plus


Step 2: Migrating the 701 Sample Application Procedure

1.

Select Application | Open. The Application Migration Options dialog box will appear.

2. Accept the default settings (as shown in the illustration above) by clicking OK. The following message box appears:

User’s Guide

259


3. Click Yes to continue. The 701 application is saved in the ScanTools Plus format and the ScanTools Plus 701 application definition window opens. However, form No. 221681 is not shown until you select the correct document.

Step 3: Selecting the Correct Document within the Application Procedure

260

1.

From the ScanTools Plus application definition window menu bar, select Document | Select. The Select Document dialog box will appear.

ScanTools Plus


2. At the Title drop-down combo box, select GPAS #221681 Tutorial from the drop-down list.

Step 4: Adding the Background Form Images Procedure

1.

In the Select Document dialog box, click the Add All Images button. The Add Background Images for Sheet 1 of 1 dialog box will appear.

2. Click the Browse button in the Top Background Form Image group box. You will see a list of .tif files in the C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\Applications directory. Select 2216811.tif and click Open. The Add Background Images for Sheet 1 of 1 dialog box will reappear with the File Name box populated. 3. Click the Browse button in the Bottom Background Form Image group box. The same list of .tif files will reappear. This time select 2216812.tif and click Open. The Add Background Images for Sheet 1 of 1 dialog box will reappear as shown below:

4. Click OK. The Select Document dialog box will reappear.

User’s Guide

261


5. Click OK to load the two background form images. The top background form image with the grid definitions superimposed will appear as shown below:

6. Select Application | Save to save the application with the background form images added. 7. You can adjust the size of the image display by moving the zoom level slider. You can also adjust the transparency of the background form image and the

262

ScanTools Plus


grid definions (as well as other elements) by clicking Design Settings. If you have questions during the tutorial, this 701 Sample Application is available for you as a reference or to check your work. The application can also be used for real-world jobs including tests, surveys, or questionnaires. Next, we will be creating a similar application from scratch. To do this, proceed to the next lesson. NOTE: We recommend that you perform the following

lessons exactly as described in the tutorial so that the application you define through the lessons is identical to that in the 701 Sample Application.

User’s Guide

263

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Creating a New Application

Creating a New Application Learning Objectives


Procedure

Create a new application consistent with the GPAS #221681 Tutorial document in the 701 Sample Application. Select the appropriate Application Settings.

NOTE: You need to use your scanner for this procedure.

Make sure that it has been set up properly and that the power is turned on.

1.

Select Scantron | ScanTools Plus from the Programs list. This starts the ScanTools Plus software and displays the ScanTools Plus main window.

2. Select Application | New from the menu. This displays the ScanTools Plus application definition window. 3. Select Application | Settings from the menu. The Application Settings dialog box appears. 4. Uncheck the Release for scanning check box. An application is not ready to be released for scanning until an output format and at least one field has been defined. We will check this box in a later lesson when the application is complete. Disregard the remainder of the settings in the Application Settings dialog box as they are for image (not OMR only) scanners. 5. Click OK. You have now successfully set the initial settings for your ScanTools Plus application.

264

ScanTools Plus

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Creating a New Document

Creating a New Document Learning Objectives

In this lesson you will: • • •

Terms

Create a new document. Add a Background Form Image. Ensure that Background Form Image Rotation is correct.

Form ID Marks: Small black rectangles usually at the top of the form that uniquely identify it. ScanTools Plus requires that each sheet in an application has a unique form ID mark. Timing Marks: A column of small black rectangles that follow the guide edge of the form. Each timing mark indicates to the scanner a row in which response bubbles can be positioned.

Step 1: Checking Image Orientation Prepare for document creation by first viewing the background form image to determine the location of the timing marks. Procedure

1.

Using Windows Explorer, find the two background form images for this exercise that came with your ScanTools Plus software. They are in directory C:\Program Files\Scantron\ScanTools Plus\Applications with file names 2216811.tif and 2216812.tif.

2. Open the first file using an imaging program (like Microsoft Paint) by selecting 2216811.tif. Right click and select Open With. Select Microsoft Paint from the list by left clicking. The image will be displayed in

User’s Guide

265


the Paint program. Note the position of the timing marks. (They are on the left side of the image.)

3. Open the 2216812.tif file in the same manner as you did the first file. Notice that the timing marks are on the right for this file. You have now successfully determined the position of the timing marks for the background form images. That information will be important to you when you add the background form image to your new document in the next section.

Step 2: Creating the New Document and Adding the Background Form Image Next we need to create the document and add the background form image. Knowing the location of the timing marks is important because we will need to specify Rotation during this process. Procedure

266

1.

Select New from the Document menu to display the New Document dialog.

ScanTools Plus


2. In the Title field, type the name of the document. For this tutorial, we will call it Learning Document. 3. In the Options section of the New Document dialog box, click Add All Images. The dialog Add Background Form Images for Sheet 1 of 1 is displayed. 4. Select the Browse... button in the Top Background Form Image area. The Specify form image file dialog opens (defaulting to the \Applications directory). 5. Select 2216811.tif from the list. Select Open to exit the dialog. You are returned to the Add Background Form Images for Sheet 1 of 1 dialog with the File Name box populated. 6. Select the Browse... button in the Bottom Background Form Image area. The Specify form image file dialog opens (defaulting to the \Applications directory). 7. Select 2216812.tif from the list. Select Open to exit the dialog. You are returned to the Add Background Form Images for Sheet 1 of 1 dialog with the File Name box populated. 8. Select the appropriate Rotation buttons from those provided so that the timing marks will be displayed on the left side of the screen for top sheets or on the right side of the screen for bottom sheets. The background form images must be rotated to the scanned orientation for ScanTools Plus to find the form ID and timing marks. The images used in this tutorial already have their timing marks in the correct locations, so no rotation is necessary. Ensure that the top Rotation button for each file is selected. NOTE: It is important that the Flip Image / Booklet

Page check box at the bottom of the application

User’s Guide

267


definition window is unchecked when determining proper rotation. 9. Select OK to exit the dialog. Timing mark and form ID mark locations are automatically defined from the background form image. This information is displayed in text boxes in the lower left half of the New Document dialog box. NOTE: The background form images for General

Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681 are provided with ScanTools Plus software. For your applications, we recommend you have your form vendor supply background form images.

268

ScanTools Plus


10. In the New Document dialog box, click OK. The color background form image for the top sheet is displayed in the grid definition area (right side of the screen). Timing marks are displayed and numbered along the left side (guide edge). Form ID marks are displayed along the top (leading edge) in red, which indicates they have been defined for that specific location. You have now successfully created a new document and added a properly rotated background form image.

User’s Guide

269

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Creating the Output Format

Creating the Output Format Learning Objectives


Create a new output format.

Terms

Output Format: The format for each record in the data file that is written to during scanning. There is typically a header field, followed by fields for the grids on the form, followed by score and totals fields, if applicable.

Concept

An output record format must be created prior to defining grids on the form so that the scanned data is organized in the sequence you need.

Procedure

1.

Select New from the Output menu to display the New Output Format dialog.

2. In the Name field, type the name of the output format. For this tutorial, we will call it Learning Output Format. 3. Ensure that the Apply Output Format to current document check box is checked. If not, click the left mouse button to insert a check mark.

4. Click OK. You have now successfully created an output record format. Notice in the lower left corner of the screen that the Output is now defined as Learning Output Format. 270

ScanTools Plus

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Saving the Application

Saving the Application Learning Objectives


Terms

Procedure

Give the application a name and number Save the application

Application Number: Every application is required to have a three-digit number associated with it in order to ensure that it has a unique identifier. If you do not put in a number, ScanTools will select the next available number in sequence after the currently displayed application number. The Windows file name for the application is always a “z,” followed by the application number, followed by the .sds suffix (e.g. z100.sds). 1.

Select Save or Save As from the Application menu. On the first save, the Save As dialog box will appear for either command.

2. Because we have not defined any output fields, the APP4153 message box will appear asking if you want to save. Click Yes to continue. 3. In the Save As dialog box, type in the title and number for your application. For this tutorial, in the Title field, type Learning, and in the Number field, type 700.

User’s Guide

271

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Saving the Application

NOTE: If the number 700 has been used, select the next

sequential number.

4. Click OK. 5. Once an application has been given a name and number using the Save As dialog box, subsequent saves can be performed by selecting Application | Save. This saves the application using the same name and number by overwriting the previous version. You have now successfully named and saved the application.

272

ScanTools Plus

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Defining a Field

Defining a Field Learning Objectives


Terms

Define a field.

NOTE: The following terms are found in the Ouput Field

Entry dialog box.

Display Field: When checked, the fields are displayed on the screen whenever a document is scanned or edited. More than one field can be defined as a display field; however, a total of 20 characters can be displayed during scanning operations. Any fields defined after the 20-character limit will not appear. Field: A portion of a data record (e.g. name, birth date, ID number, etc). Every grid must correspond to a field. However, not every field has a corresponding grid. Some fields, such as score and totals fields, contain data from other sources. Fixed Length: When checked, you must enter the fixed length of the field, in characters. If you are defining grids using the OMR Tool, the length you enter must be as long as or longer than the field length. When unchecked, the length of the field is dynamically sized by ScanTools to contain the data generated by the grid(s) associated with the field. Fixed length is required for the following fields: • • •


Grid: A set of response positions on a form that denote data collection areas.

User’s Guide

273


Concept

When you define a field, you are setting aside space in the output record for data. A field can be alphanumeric, numeric, 1-digit, 2-digit, date, or evaluate. Most fields have grids associated with them for data collection. However, some fields do not have grids associated with them. These fields can be used to store other data. A later lesson will show you how to use a field to store the Score of a test. In this lesson, you will define the Name field that will collect the first and last names as well as the middle initial of the respondents. The field will be alphanumeric. In subsequent lessons, you will learn how to define grids using two methods, and how to associate grids with the field using the Append command.

Procedure



2. In the Output Field Entry dialog box, use the following settings: • • •

274

Name = Name. Type = Alphanumeric. In the Attributes group box, verify that Display Field is selected.

ScanTools Plus


•

Fixed Length = Unchecked.

3. Click OK. This defines the field. Notice that Name* appears in the Fields list in the lower left corner of the screen. The asterisk indicates that Name is a field which has no grids associated with it. The next task is to define a grid which will define the response positions from which data will be collected. You have now successfully defined a field. In the next lesson, we will define a grid and then associate it with the Name field.

User’s Guide

275

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method

Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method Learning Objectives


Terms

Define a grid using the Background Form Image Method.

Designator: The letter, number, or symbol that can be found within a bubble. Grid: A set of response positions on a form that denote data collection areas. Mark Style: The mark style represented in the selected grid. The choices are: bubble, check mark (for image scanners only), or tick mark (for image scanners only). Orientation: The direction of first response to last response.

Concept

By defining an OMR grid on the background form image, you define response positions that the scanner can evaluate as to whether they are filled in or not. The grid type (alphanumeric, numeric, etc.) should correspond to the field with which it is associated. In this lesson, you will define the grid by simply drawing it right on top of the background form image. This is the fastest and easiest method to define a grid. However, it is only possible if a background form image is available. Another method must be used if a background form image is not available (or cannot be created using a flatbed scanner). That method is covered in a later lesson.

Procedure

1.


2. If the OMR Tool dialog box is not displayed, click the OMR button in the upper left corner of the screen. 3. In the OMR Tool dialog, use the following settings: 276

ScanTools Plus


• • • •

Type = Alphanumeric Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1

•

Orientation = Left

4. Move the mouse pointer to the upper right corner of the Name grid (while Last Name, First Name, and MI are shown separately, we will be treating them as a single Name grid). Start at the blank bubble and not at the “write-in” boxes. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer to the lower left corner of the Name grid. Now release the mouse button. The grid designators will appear blue over the orange designators visible in the background form image. Your grid should look like the illustration shown on the next page.

User’s Guide

277




You have now successfully drawn the Name grid. The designators should align with those visible in the background form image. The arrow shown in the grid indicates the grid data order.

278

ScanTools Plus

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Associating a Grid with a Field using the Append Command

Associating a Grid with a Field using the Append Command Learning Objectives


Concept

Associate a grid with a field using the Append command.

Once the field and grid have been defined, it is necessary to “associate” the two by appending the grid to the field. This is done through the Append command. Once associated, data collected from the grid response positions is stored in the associated field. Once a grid has been defined, it must be appended to a field. If you go to another task without appending, the grid definition is lost. NOTE: You can append multiple grids to a single field. Data

is collected in the same order as the grids are listed, so it is important to properly position the grids within the list. If necessary, you can drag the grids up and down in the Grids list to the desired location after appending.

Procedure

1.

Once the grid has been drawn, ensure that the field you want to associate to is highlighted in the Fields list.

2. Click Append (in the lower left corner of the screen) to associate the grid with the field. Notice that the grid is now listed in the Grids list as a grid 21 characters long with an alphanumeric type. Notice also that the Name field is highlighted which indicates that it is associated wtih the Name grid. 3. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully associated a grid with a field.

User’s Guide

279

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Defining a Grid Using the Corners Method

Defining a Grid Using the Corners Method Learning Objectives

In this lesson you will: • • • • •

Concept

Define a field. Mark the corners of a grid region on a blank form to help you place your grid. Scan the form to use as a background form image for application development only. Define the grid using the corners as a guide. Restore the 2216811.tif and 2216812.tif background form images for use in the remaining lessons.

While we strongly recommend getting a background form image from your forms vendor, you may run into a situation where you need to define an application without a background form image. In those situations, you will need to use a different method for grid placement than the one you just learned. This lesson will show you how to define a grid without a background form image. It is called the “Corners Method.” There are two disadvantages associated with this method: • •

It takes longer than the background form image method. The form’s dropout colors will not be visible. This means that you will not be able to use the form’s bubbles and designators for grid placement.

In this lesson, you will be defining a single grid for the sake of the lesson. However, if you were actually defining an application for a form, you would find it most efficient to mark all the grids on the form prior to scanning it. That way, you could define each of the grids without having to rescan the image.

280

ScanTools Plus


NOTE: The grid you defined in “Defining a Grid Using the

Background Form Image Method” on page 276, will be present on your scanned background form image. Please ignore it for this lesson and focus on the Identification Number grid.

Step 1: Defining the Field Before we can place the grid, we must define the field. We will be using the same method that we used in “Defining a Field” on page 273. Procedure




Name = Ident Type = Numeric In the Attributes group box, no boxes should be checked Fixed Length = Unchecked

3. Click OK. The field has been defined and added to the Fields list in the lower left corner.

Step 2: Setting the Design Settings The Design Settings dialog box is where you control parameters that affect how the form looks on your display. You can control the transparency of the background form image, OMR bubbles, gridlines, and grid definitions. You can also control the spacing on the gridlines. In this lesson, we will set the Design Settings to general settings that will work for the remainder of the lessons. User’s Guide

281


However, you should feel free to adjust them if there is something you would like to see more clearly. Procedure

1.

Prepare for scanning a sheet by ensuring that the Design Settings parameters are set correctly. Click on Design Settings. The Design Settings dialog box will appear.

2. Set the parameters to the following: • • • • •

Background Image = 50% OMR Bubbles = 100% Gridlines = 25% Grid Definitions = 100% Rulers and Gridlines = Cells / Timing Marks

3. Click Close to see the results of the new settings.

Step 3: Marking the Grid Region and Scanning a Sheet In this section, you will mark the grid region on the form so that you can later define the grid using the OMR Tool. You will also scan the form so that you are able to see on 282

ScanTools Plus


the screen the marks you made on the form. Scanning a sheet for grid placement automatically removes the background form images. We will restore them at the end of this lesson. Procedure

1.

On a blank General Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681, use a pencil to fill in the bubbles in the corners of the grid. Mark the 0 and 9 responses in the A and J columns of the Identification Number grid.

2. Select Document | Select... from the menu bar. The Select Document dialog box will appear. 3. Click the Scan Sheet button. A message box asking if it is OK to replace sheet 1 and remove the background form images will appear. 4. Click Yes. The sheet is scanned. The background form images are removed. And, timing mark and form ID mark data from the scanned form is updated in the Select Document window. 5. Click OK in the Select Document window. The grid you placed in “Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method” is visible along with the four marks you made in this lesson. Notice that the drop

User’s Guide

283


out colors used on the form are not visible as they were when the background form image was in place.

NOTE: The image shown above is called a “synthesized

image” because it represents OMR data areas only and is not a fully detailed representation of the actual form scanned.

6. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully scanned a sheet for grid placement. In the next lesson, you will place a grid on the four corners you marked.

Step 4: Defining a Grid Using the Corners Method In this section, you will define a grid using the corners that you marked in the previous section. Procedure

1.

Ensure that the Ident field is highlighted in the Fields list box in the lower left corner of the screen.

2. If the OMR Tool dialog box is not displayed, click the OMR button in the upper left corner of the screen. 3. In the OMR Tool dialog, use the following settings: 284

ScanTools Plus


• • • •

Type = Numeric Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1

•

Orientation = Left

4. Starting in the upper right corner and moving to the lower left corner, draw a grid including the four corners for the Identification Number grid that you marked in the previous section. Your grid should look like the illustration shown below. NOTE: If you make a mistake, click the Undo Grid


5. Associate the Identification Number grid with the Ident field by clicking the Append button. Notice that the Ident field is highlighted in the Fields list and that the 10 character numeric grid has been added to the Grids list.

User’s Guide

285


6. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully defined a grid using the Corners Method and associated that grid with a field. Next you will do some clean-up before moving on to the next lesson.

Step 5: Restoring the 2216811.tif and 2216812.tif Background Form Images Procedure

Next, you will re-load the background form images provided with your ScanTools Plus software so that you can define grids using the Background Form Image Method in the remaining lessons. 1.

Select Document | Select from the main menu bar. The Select Document window appears.

2. Re-load the background form images as described in steps 3 to 10 of “Step 2: Creating the New Document and Adding the Background Form Image” on page 266. NOTE: The dialog box will be entitled Select Document

as opposed to New Document because you are selecting the document rather than creating it.

3. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully restored the background form image and are ready to go to the next lesson.

286

ScanTools Plus

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Defining a Date Field and the Associated Grids

Defining a Date Field and the Associated Grids Learning Objectives


Terms

Learn how to collect date data using one field and five grids. Associate grids of different types with a single field with a Date type.

Two Digit Response: A grid type that uses the decimal characters 01 through 99. Fixed Length: When checked, you must enter the fixed length of the field, in characters. If you are defining grids using the OMR Tool, the length you enter must be as long as or longer than the field length generated by ScanTools from the associated grids. When unchecked, the length of the field is dynamically sized by ScanTools to contain the data generated by the grid(s) associated with the field. Fixed length is required for the following fields: • • •

Concept

We will use the five grids listed below to collect data for the field Birth Date. These grids will be associated with a single field named Birthdate that is 8 characters long and of type Date. All five grids will appear under the BIRTH DATE data area on the General Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681. • •

User’s Guide


The grid for month (MO) will be defined as a two-digit response grid. (A single row of bubbles will represent the digits 01 to 12.) The first digit of the Day grid will be defined as a numeric grid (0 to 3). 287


• • • Procedure

The second digit of the Day grid will be defined as a numeric grid (0 to 9). The first digit of the Year grid will be defined as a numeric grid (0 to 2). The last three digits of the Year grid will be defined as a numeric grid (0 to 9).

1.

Define a field called Birthdate as described in “Defining a Field” on page 273. Use the following settings:

• • • •

Name = Birthdate. Type = Date. In the Attributes field, be sure no boxes are checked. Check the Fixed Length option and set the field length to 8 by typing an 8 in the text box.

2. Define grid 1 as described in “Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method” on page 276. In the OMR Tool, use the following settings: • • • • •

Type = Two digit response Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1 Orientation = Left

3. Click Append to associate grid 1 with the Birthdate field. 4. Define grids 2 through 5 as described in “Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method” on page 276. Click Append after defining each grid. In the OMR Tool, use the following settings for each of the grids: • 288

Type = Numeric ScanTools Plus


• • • •

Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1 Orientation = Left

5. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully defined the Birthdate field complete with associated grids.

User’s Guide

289

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Defining and Using a Translate Table

Defining and Using a Translate Table Learning Objectives


Create a translate table. Define a field and grid using a user-defined data type.

Terms

Translate Table: A table used to store values for a user-defined data type. For example, the translate table for the type Gender that we will use in this lesson includes Female and Male.

Concept

The Gender grid offers the respondent two choices, F or M. Marking one or the other writes the words Female or Male to the data record. Since Gender is not a standard data type available in ScanTools Plus software, you will need to create a custom data type by using a translate table.

Step 1: Defining a Translate Table Procedure

1.

In the upper left corner of the screen, click the Translate button. The Translate Tool dialog box is displayed.

2. Click the Add Table button in the top part of the dialog box. The Add Translate Table dialog box is displayed. 3. Type the name of the table in the Name field. For this tutorial, type Gender.

290

ScanTools Plus


4. Click OK to close the Add Translate Table dialog box. 5. At the bottom of the Translate tool dialog box, click the Add Entry button. The Translate Table Entry dialog box is displayed. NOTE: For an explanation of the Omit and Multiple

responses, consult the Help system.

6. The Response Position field is prefilled with 1, indicating that you are about to enter the character or string to assign to the first bubble in the grid. In the Translate String: field, type Female. 7. Click OK. 8. Click the Add Entry button again. The Translate Table Entry dialog box is displayed. 9. Now the Response Position field is prefilled with 2, indicating that you are about to enter the character or string to assign to the second bubble in the grid. In the Translate String field, type Male.

User’s Guide

291


10. Click OK.

11. At the bottom of the Translate tool dialog box, click the Close button. You have now successfully created a translate table of type Gender. Gender will now be available in the Type drop-down list in the OMR Tool for every document in the application.

Step 2: Using a Translate Table When Defining a Field and Grid Procedure

Use the following steps to define the Gender field and grid in the document record: 1.

292

Define the field as described in “Defining a Field” on page 273. Use the following settings in the Output Field Entry dialog box: ScanTools Plus


• Name = Gender. • Type = Alphanumeric. • No boxes should be checked in Attributes. • Fixed Length = Unchecked. 2. Click OK. 3. Define the grid as described in “Defining a Grid Using the Background Form Image Method” on page 276. Use the following settings in the OMR Tool: • • • •

Type = Gender Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1

•

Orientation = Left

NOTE: While the translate table entries are defined as

Male and Female, the grid will display only an M and an F to denote the two response positions.

4. Click the Append button in the lower left corner of the screen to define the grid. NOTE: Notice that the grid width in the Grids list is 6 to

accommodate the longest string which is Female.

5. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully defined a grid for a user-defined data type. User’s Guide

293

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Defining Linked Grids

Defining Linked Grids Learning Objectives


Terms Concept

Procedure

Define a field for Grade or Education using the technique learned in “Defining a Field” on page 273. Learn how to define a linked grid for the two columns of responses.

Linked Grids: Two or more separate grids that have a continued set of response designators between them. In some cases, there is not enough room to put all responses for a question in a single column or row. When this occurs, use a linked grid to continue the responses from one grid to the next. 1.

Define the Grade field as described in “Defining a Field” on page 273. In the Output Field Entry dialog box, use the following settings: • • • •

Name = Grade. Type = Numeric. No boxes should be checked in Attributes. Fixed Length = Unchecked.

2. Click OK. 3. Define the Grade or Education grid by first ensuring that the field name is highlighted in the box in the lower left corner of the screen. 4. If the OMR Tool dialog box is not displayed, click the OMR Tool in the upper left corner of the screen. 5. In the OMR Tool dialog box, use the following settings: • 294

Type = Two digit response ScanTools Plus

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Defining Linked Grids

• • • •

Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 1 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1 Orientation = Left

6. Draw the first grid on top of the left column for the Grade or Education data area. The numbers 1 through 8 will be placed. 7. In the OMR Tool dialog box, click the Add Link to Grid button. Use the same settings as step 5 above when placing the linked grid. 8. Draw the second grid on top of the right column in the Grade or Education data area. The numbers 9 through 16 (although the “1” for the tens digit will not appear) will be placed.

9. Associate the linked grids with the Education field by clicking Append in the lower left corner of the screen. 10. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully defined linked grids and associated them with a field that you defined.

User’s Guide

295

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Defining Grids Using Copy and Paste

Defining Grids Using Copy and Paste Learning Objectives


Terms

Use Copy and Paste to define grids for the Items field. Switch to the bottom sheet and continue grid definition for the Items field.

Clipboard: A place in your computer’s memory that an item can be copied to and pasted from. Ctrl+c: The keyboard shortcut for the Copy command. Copy a grid to the Clipboard by typing a “c” while holding the Ctrl key. Ctrl+v: The keyboard shortcut for the Paste command. Paste a grid from the Clipboard by typing a “v” while holding the Ctrl key.

Concept

The Clipboard is a Windows feature that can be used in many Windows programs including ScanTools Plus. When you have multiple grids that are the same size, you can save time in defining them by copying, pasting, and repositioning. Even though the grids will appear to be the same on the bottom sheet, we will not use the copy and paste commands to place grids from the top to the bottom. This is because the orientation of the grids switches when moving from the top to the bottom.

Step 1: Defining the Items Field Procedure

1.


2. In the Output Field Entry dialog box, use the following settings: 296

ScanTools Plus


• Name = Items • Type = 1-Digit • No boxes should be checked in Attributes. • Fixed Length = Unchecked 3. Click OK. You have now successfully defined the Items field.

Step 2: Defining the Grid That Will Be Copied: Procedure

1.

Select (highlight) the Items field.

2. If the OMR Tool dialog box is not displayed, click the OMR Tool in the upper left corner of the screen. 3. In the OMR Tool, use the following settings: • • • • •

Type = One digit response Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 2 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1 Orientation = Down

4. Draw the grid on response positions 1 through 10.

User’s Guide

297


5. Click Append to associate the grid with the Items field. Your grid should look like the one in the illustration below.

6. Select Application | Save to save your work. You now have successfully defined the grid that will be copied. Next you will copy this grid to other locations on the form and append to a single field.

298

ScanTools Plus


Step 3: Copying and Pasting a Grid to Other Positions Procedure

1.

Click on the grid for response positions 1 through 10.

2. Click the Copy button or press Ctrl+C. The grid is now no longer highlighted. 3. Ensure that the Items field in the Fields list and the last grid placed in the Grids list are both highlighted. This will ensure that the pasted grid will be placed in the correct order in the Grids list. 4. Next, click the Paste button or press Ctrl+V The grid over response positions 1 through 10 will turn pink. This indicates that a grid has been pasted into that position. 5. Click and hold down the left mouse button in the center of the grid. Drag the grid so that it is positioned directly over response positions 11 through 20 and then release the mouse button. If you make a mistake, simply click and drag until the grid is properly positioned.

User’s Guide

299


6. Click Append to associate the grid with the Items field. 7. Repeat steps 3 through 6, positioning the pasted grids over the remaining response positions on the top sheet. You must place each grid in order for the data to be collected correctly. Don’t forget to click Append after positioning each grid. You have now successfully copied and pasted grids for response positions 11 through 100. Next, we will do the bottom sheet.

Step 4: Defining Grids on the Bottom Sheet Defining grids on the bottom sheet is no different than doing it on the top sheet. However, you need to resist the temptation of copying grids from the top sheet to the bottom sheet. If you do that, you will find that the orientation of the grids you paste will not be correct. Procedure

1.

Click on the Go To Bottom button in the lower left corner of the screen. The bottom sheet will appear.

NOTE: Notice that the grids have a different orientation

than those on the top side.

300

ScanTools Plus


2. Select (highlight) the Items field. 3. If the OMR Tool dialog box is not displayed, click the OMR Tool in the upper left corner of the screen. 4. In the OMR Tool, use the following settings: • • • • •

Type = One digit response Mark Style = Bubble Cell spacing (Cell) = 2 Timing mark spacing (TM) = 1 Orientation = Up

Notice that, on the top sheet, the orientation was Down while, on the bottom sheet, the orientation is Up. 5. Draw the grid on response positions 101 through 110.

User’s Guide

301


6. Click Append to associate the grid with the Items field. Your grid should look like the one in the illustration below.

7. Copy the grid you just placed to the remaining response positions using the method you learned in “Step 3: Copying and Pasting a Grid to Other Positions” on page 299. Be sure to: • •

302

place the grids in order to ensure that the data is collected correctly. click Append after placing each grid.

ScanTools Plus


When you are done, your bottom sheet should look like the illustration below.

8. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have now successfully defined the grids for the Items field on the bottom sheet.

User’s Guide

303

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Defining a Score Field

Defining a Score Field Learning Objectives


Terms

Define a field for the Score of the General Purpose Answer Sheet No. 221681

1- or 2- Digit Field Data Types: 1- or 2-Digit field data types are required for items that will be scored. The items to be scored must also be marked on the associated key sheet. If you specify 1- or 2-Digit field data type for items you do not wish to score, do not mark these items on a key sheet. Score: A number associated with the number of responses on a scanned form that match the answer key. Key Data: In scoring, the correct responses for a test. Key data can be either in the form of a document filled in with the correct responses or data files created using correctly filled in documents that have been scanned.

Concept

Up to this point, every field we created in the output record has had one or more grids associated with it. However, in this lesson, we will create a field that does not have a grid associated with it. Instead, we will use the field to store the value of the score of scanned forms. Scoring can be done online, or as a post-scan activity that is accessed through the main ScanTools window. The ScanTools score module allows you to score multiplechoice and true/false tests through the use of 1- or 2- digit field data types. Scoring consists of determining correct and incorrect responses by comparing the test data to key data. The key data can be stored in the profile, or can be scanned online. The actual scoring process is beyond the scope of this tutorial. The following describes how to set up the Score field.

304

ScanTools Plus

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Defining a Score Field

1.



Name = Score Type = Numeric. No boxes should be checked in Attributes. Fixed Length = 6 for this example. A total score requires a minimum of 5, and a subtest score requires a minimum of 4.

3. Click OK. Score* is displayed in the field list in the lower left corner. The asterisk indicates that it is a field with no grids associated with it.

4. Select Application | Save to save your work. You have just successfully defined a field to store score data.

User’s Guide

305

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application

Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application Learning Objectives


Concept

Procedure

Ready your application for scanning by checking Release for Scanning Exit the Application Definition Module. Optional: Copy your work to removable media by creating an application diskette.

In this lesson, we will wrap up application definition. The fields for the data file have been created. The grids have been placed and associated with the appropriate fields. All that remains is to release the application for scanning, and , if desired, to copy the application to a removable media. 1.

When all fields and grids are defined, your application is ready to be released for scanning. To do this, select Application | Settings. The Application Settings window is displayed.

2. Check the Release for scanning check box so that the application can be scanned. 3. Click OK to continue. You are returned to the Application Definition Module. 4. Select Application | Save to save your work. 5. Select Application | Exit to exit the Application Definition Module. 6. To copy your application to removable media, select Configure | Make Application Disk.... The Make Application Disk dialog box appears. 7. Highlight your new application by selecting 700 Learning Document.

306

ScanTools Plus

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner Releasing for Scanning and Saving the Application

8. To save all components of your application (recommended), check all boxes in the Copy Input/ Configuration Files of Type and the Copy Output/ Produced Files of Type groups. 9. In the Copy To text box, enter the drive letter and directory that you wish to copy the application to. 10. Click OK to continue. The Copy Application Files dialog box appears. 11. All application files are selected. We recommend copying them all. However, if desired, you can deselect or reselect a file by simply clicking on it while holding the Ctrl key. 12. When the files you wish to copy are selected, click the Copy button to copy the files. You have now successfully released your application for scanning and copied your application to disk. That concludes this tutorial.

User’s Guide

307

Appendix B: Tutorial: Creating an Application for an OMR Scanner If You Need More Practice

If You Need More Practice Talk with your Scantron representative about additional training services and materials available or visit our Web site at www.scantron.com. Custom application development is available through the Scantron Services Group by calling 1-800-338-5544.

308

ScanTools Plus

C Appendix C: Data File Format Scanned data is formatted and stored in data files. The files contain standard ASCII characters and can be viewed with a text editor. Before scanning, you need to create and select a data file using the ScanTools Plus Main window Data File menu. The New Data File dialog box enables you to enter the name for a new data file. A data file can have a long file name. The name can include spaces but must not include any of the following special characters: : “ | < > ? / * Also, valid DOS device names should not be used, such as: aux, com1, com2, com3, com4, con, lpt1, lpt2, lpt3 User’s Guide

309

Appendix C: Data File Format

Data files have the following characteristics: •

Each scanning task creates a file with the name you specify and the extension .DAT. The file contains an individual document record for each document scanned. • Each document record is a string of ASCII characters. A carriage return/linefeed (CR/LF) is used to terminate each record, and an end-of-file marker (Ctrl-Z) is displayed after the last record. • The first 40 characters of the string comprise the NCS Header. • The remaining characters of the string are document data as defined in the application's output format. When scanning multiple documents that use record formats of different lengths, each document record is padded with spaces, if necessary, to make all records equal in length to the longest record format. • The NCS Header and each data item occupies a fixed number of characters in a fixed position in the string. This simple data format facilitates conversion of data files to custom formats or importation to other databases. The content of the NCS Header is described in online help.

310

ScanTools Plus

D Appendix D: Glossary A application

application module

archiving

User’s Guide

A set of rules that governs how your personal computer collects data from your scanner and how it stores this information on your disk. It contains one or more document definitions and their associated output formats. The software used to create an application consisting of one or more documents. The application module has its own set of menus separate from the ScanTools main window. For details, see Application Module in online help. Image archiving is the process of extracting individual image clips and associated items from the master clip file created during scanning, and writing the archival clips as separate entities into a user-defined directory. It is a process of rearranging clips and fields from data record 311

Appendix D: Glossary archive image scaling–background form image

into a format more comprehensible to some other archiving software. archive image scaling

Located on the Application Settings dialog, this feature is used to change the resolution of the scanned image during archive. The archived image will be saved in the selectedresolution (200 DPI, 240 DPI, 300 DPI, 400 DPI or 600 DPI). For image scanners only.

B background form image

A color TIFF file that matches the printed form that will be scanned. This file is used in application definition, post-scan editing, and image archiving. Ideally, the file should be supplied by the vendor who printed the form. It should be in the same orientation as the way the form is scanned and paper size should be the same as the scanned form. For two-sided forms, top and bottom side paper size must be identical. For best performance, the TIFF file should be 16-color and have a resolution of 150 - 400 dpi, with 400 providing the best image quality. If your forms vendor is unable to supply the file, you have several options: •

•

312

If you use Scantron DesignExpert software with the optional PrintFlex module to design your forms, you can use the Export Background Form Image option to create your own background form image. This file is suitable for application definition, post-scan editing, and image archiving. If you have a Scantron image scanner, you can scan the form during application definition. This results in a grayscale image of the non-dropout color elements on the form. Elements in dropout color will not appear in the file. This file is suitable for application definition only.

ScanTools Plus

Appendix D: Glossary bar code–character

•

If you have a flatbed color scanner, you can scan the form to create a TIFF file. This file is suitable for application definition only.

bar code

A series of parallel lines and spaces of varying widths, printed on a form, or affixed to a form with a label. When decoded, a bar code represents a string of alphanumeric characters.

batch

A batch is a collection of sheets that are scanned, one after another, as a group. You can assign a common batch number to each sheet in a batch.

bias bar

The EZData scanner requires that a bias bar be defined for every sheet of every form. A bias bar is a row of 12 black cells and is used at scanning time to make certain the scanner read head is functioning properly, before scanning forms. The bias bar is on all printed forms used by the EZData scanner. EZData scanners are single-sided scanners so the bias bar is always on the top side of the form.

booklet

A document that contains more than one sheet.

booklet sequence check

A booklet sequence check determines if sheets are being scanned in proper order. Two types of booklet sequence checks are available. The ascending sequence check verifies that each sheet scanned has a higher sequence number than the previous one. The sequential sequence check verifies that each sheet scanned has a sequence number one greater than the number of the previous sheet. Both checks require the first and last sheets of a booklet to be scanned.

C character

User’s Guide

A character is: (1) A single letter, digit, or symbol, or (2) the string of response positions on a form that is needed to represent a single letter, digit, or symbol.

313

Appendix D: Glossary configuration sheet–document definition

configuration sheet

context

A configuration sheet is a special form used to configure a scanner. When a completed configuration sheet is scanned, it sets the communications protocol of the scanner that scans it. Configuration sheets vary from scanner to scanner, and not all scanners use them. All of the variables associated with a scanning task. It includes the application, the data file, the edit profile, the score profile, and the conversion profile.

context file

An ASCII text file that allows you to start ScanTools Plus software from the Run dialog box or to create your own icon and command line to automate a particular ScanTools Plus function.

conversion profile

A set of rules that enables ScanTools Plus software to convert a standard data file into one of a different format.

D data file

314

A computer file that contains data from scanned documents.

dialog box

A Microsoft Windows term for a box or window that is displayed on your screen when ScanTools Plus software needs more information to complete a task.

document

One or more sheets, when scanned, produce one document record in a data file. One document creates one document record, and many documents can be in one application.

document definition

The part of an application that defines where information is located on a document. It governs how the computer handles the information from data the scanner provides. The definition includes number of sheets in the document, location of form ID marks, timing marks, and skew marks, location and types of grids, and which field the data from each grid will be stored in.

ScanTools Plus

Appendix D: Glossary document record–edit profile

document record

A part of a data file that represents the information obtained from one document.

document sequence record

The part of an application that defines the order in which to scan the documents.

domain resolution

An output field attribute that causes the field's grids to be resolved (scanned and translated into data) using a read level threshold that is based on the average read level of all marks in the field's grids. Basing the read level threshold on the actual darkness of the marks in the field ensures that fields with marks that are especially dark (on average) are resolved. When applying domain resolution to a grid using binary resolution (binary, binary coded decimal, or litho-code), domain resolution is performed on a single grid within the field rather than on the average of all marks in all grids in the field (as all other resolution types do). When you use domain resolution, the read levels for all of the marks in the field are averaged. If there are more than 15 marks, the read level threshold is set at the average read level minus 4 for OpScan scanners. If there are less than 15 marks, the read level threshold is set at the average read level minus 5 for OpScan scanners. The read level threshold is never lowered (as a result of using domain resolution) below what it would be if you did not use domain resolution. It can only be raised. Marks that have read levels less than the read level threshold are interpreted as omits. NOTE: The EZData scanner does not support domain

resolution.

E edit profile

User’s Guide

A set of rules used to determine whether data collected from scanning is valid, and what to do if it isn't.

315

Appendix D: Glossary field–graybox (ICR/OCR)

F field

A portion of a document record that is reserved for one piece of information.

file

A file is a collection of records that contain related information stored on disk and retrieved from disk at the same time.

file bar

The area of the scanning module main window which allows you to select the current context for the action you are performing. You can select the desired application, data file, and appropriate profile. The display of the file bar is controlled from the main window Options, File Bar menu.

file format

The format of a file specifies the manner in which data is internally represented in it. ScanTools Plus gives you the ability to convert files to a number of standard formats that are used by other software packages.

form

A sheet(s) of paper on which data is gathered and can be scanned. The sheet(s) contains Form ID Marks and timing marks, and it complies with dimensional restrictions imposed by the scanner.

form ID marks

Small black rectangles at the top of the form that uniquely identify it. ScanTools Plus requires that each sheet in an application has a unique form ID mark.

G graybox (ICR/OCR)

316

A defined region of a form that is evaluated for the presence of data, for recognition of machine printed and hand printed text, and for archiving of the associated image clip. It is defined in a ScanTools Plus application using the Graybox tool and requires installation of the optional RealTime Character Recognition component for implementation.

ScanTools Plus

Appendix D: Glossary graybox (standard)–ICR/OCR

graybox (standard)

grid

A defined region of a form that is evaluated for the presence of data and for archiving of the associated image clip. It is defined in a ScanTools Plus application using the Graybox tool. Standard grayboxes are commonly used in applications that require key from image for data capture. One or more response position strings on a form that, together, represent one piece of information. The following grid types are available in ScanTools Plus: • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Alphabetic, no space Alphanumeric Bar code BCD - binary-coded decimal Binary Binary (scoring) Binary with Parity Graybox Literal Litho-code Numeric One-digit response Two-digit response

I ICR/OCR

User’s Guide

Intelligent Character Recognition/Optical Character Recognition (for image scanners only). The interpretation of both hand printed and machine printed letters and numbers. ICR is also called Handprint Recognition. See documentation for the optional RealTime Character Recognition component for additional information, including application definition for character recognition and formatting handprint and machine print areas for best results.

317

Appendix D: Glossary image clip–iNAME Merge

image clip

A photographic representation of all or a portion of a scanned sheet created as a TIF (tagged image file format) or JPG image file. You define image clips in the application module as part of an application definition of a document. Image clips can be used in the following ways: • • •

318

You can use them in the data editor to resolve edit failures without needing to access the paper-scanned sheets. They can be archived for viewing by another program at a later date. They can be interpreted by the optional RealTime Character Recognition component for recognition of machine printed and hand printed text.

image header field

An optional block of data after the NCS Header in the document record. The image header field can only be used by ScanTools Plus Link SDK and is used for image scanner applications only. When an image scanner is used and the application definition includes image clipping, the image header field provides information about the location and quantity of clips for each document scanned. See Add/Remove Image Header Fields in online help.

iNAME image archiving

iNAME is a ScanTools software function that enables you to perform scan-time image archiving. This includes archiving of image files created during scanning, user-defined archive file and path naming, indexing, and control of which fields to archive. iNAME configuration is integrated with ScanTools application definition.

iNAME Merge

iNAME Merge is a post-scan function that is run after iNAME image archiving is complete. It lets you merge a background form image into the individual image files that were generated by iNAME archiving. It also lets you rotate images, and change the image scaling to a different resolution than what was produced at scan-time.

ScanTools Plus

Appendix D: Glossary key–mark all that apply field

K key

The actual data that the sheet (data) is scored against.

key data

In scoring, the correct responses for a test. Key data can be either in the form of a document filled in with the correct responses or data files created when the correctly filled in documents have been scanned.

key from image

Key from Image (KFI) literally means looking at an image and keying in the characters.

L linked grids

literal

litho-code

Two or more non-contiguous grids can be defined as one grid by using the OMR tool Add Link to Grid button. After defining one grid, you can continue the grid in another location on the same sheet by pressing the button and defining another grid. The grids can be on the same side of a single sheet or they can span the front and back of a single sheet. They cannot span across multiple sheets. Linked grids must be of the same type and output length; however, the grid spacing can be different. A character or string that is always written to every document record. It is created in a ScanTools Plus application using the Literal tool. A litho-code is an optional, binary-coded serial number unique to every form. They are pre-printed grids that are used to check that all sheets in a booklet are from the same individual document.

M mark all that apply field

User’s Guide

An output field attribute that allows data collection from a single grid where two or more response positions can be marked. Each response is translated to one or more characters defined in a translate table. 319

Appendix D: Glossary mark all that apply field (left justify)–mod 10 edit

The output field for the grid contains both characters from the translate table for marked responses and spaces for responses not marked, in the order defined in the translate table. The number of characters included for each response position is based on the length of the largest character string in the translate table. mark all that apply field (left justify)

An output field attribute that allows data collection from a single grid where two or more response positions can be marked. Each response is translated to one or more characters defined in a translate table. The output field for the grid contains both characters from the translate table for marked responses and spaces for responses not marked. The character strings for marked responses are left justified within the field. The field is space-filled on the right for responses not marked. The number of characters included for each response position is based on the length of the largest character string in the translate table.

mark all that apply grid

mark threshold

mod 10 edit

320

A type of grid where it is acceptable for any number (all through none) of response positions to be marked. It is commonly used for surveys. The grid must be a single column or a single row. If your application requires “Mark All That Apply” data collection, we recommend using the Mark All That Apply or Mark All That Apply (Left Justify) output field attribute types, see above. The output field attributes provide more features and are easier to implement than the Mark All That Apply grid method. The mark threshold defines how dark a mark must be before it is “seen” by the scanner. The mark threshold may be varied using the ScanTools Plus application. In an edit profile, an edit type that is usually used to check the validity of data collected from a grid. It checks the completeness of data and then applies a special checksum test. The checksum test is useful to make sure that no digits in the field have been transposed and that no single digits have been misread.

ScanTools Plus

Appendix D: Glossary multiple–OMR from Scanner

multiple

A multiple is when more than one response position in a response position string has been marked. Multiples are indicated in records by an asterisk (*).

N NCS Header

A block of data at the beginning of every document record that identifies it.

O omit

An omit is when no response positions have been marked in a response position string. Omits are indicated in records by a space.

OMR - Optical Mark Recognition

Optical Mark Recognition (OMR) is the process of machine recognition of pencil or pen marks on a page and the production of a text data file output. The technology supports multiple choice questions, surveys, and mark-allthat-apply questions using defined grids of bubble response positions. Unlike “mark sense” software, the OMR solution not only determines which marks have been filled in by the respondent, but is able to distinguish the intended response when more than one bubble has been marked. This is important in applications like test scoring where erasures may appear as dark marks and be incorrectly scored.

OMR from Image

In ScanTools Plus Application Settings, an option that creates OMR data from a scanned image that is stored in the buffer in the memory of the personal computer attached to the scanner; the image is accessed by ScanTools Plus software. When the configured scanner is an OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20, or iNSIGHT 30, this is always used.

OMR from Scanner

In ScanTools Plus Application Settings, an option that allows OMR data to be created in the scanner and sent to ScanTools Plus software in ASCII format. Transmitting ASCII data is faster than transmitting an image. This

User’s Guide

321

Appendix D: Glossary online edit correction–preslug

option is faster than OMR from Image when Enable Image = No Image or Top Only in the Application Settings dialog. This is an option for the OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 scanner with imaging. online edit correction

output field output format

A scanning option that lets you correct failing document records while the scanner is scanning the forms. This requires that an edit profile be selected at scanning time. ScanTools Plus does not display an image clip during online edit correction. The part of a document record that contains a discrete data item. A collection of output fields and associated grids for a document. An output format is required for each document; it is defined and selected in a document in the application. The output format provides a way to define individual output fields, order them in the sequence you need, and associate them with grids.

P

322

path

A path specifies a file's logical location on disk. It consists of the disk drive designation, one or more directory names, the file name, and the file extension. Its format is: \Parentdirectory\subdirectory\filename.ext.

phantom clips

For image scanners only. Phantom clips are empty image clips taken to provide targeting for post-scan editing. Phantom clipping is used extensively to provide cueing for the data editor. Every response row/column in every clipped grid and every resolved character in every ICR/ OCR graybox is represented by a phantom clip. If desired, phantom clipping can be disabled from the Advanced Configuration dialog box.

preslug

Pre-printing of responses in OMR grids, often in black ink, so they can be read by the scanner. This is typically done on the form before it is given to the respondent. In a ScanTools Plus application, preslug resolution is an output ScanTools Plus

Appendix D: Glossary PrintFlex–response position string

field attribute that compensates for light pre-slugged marks on a grid. In a ScanTools Plus edit profile, preslug is a completeness checking type that compensates for light pre-slugged marks. Preslug resolution and preslug completeness edit cannot be used for grid types: Binary, Binary with Parity, Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) or Litho-code. PrintFlex

An optional Scantron DesignExpert software module that, with a PostScript laser printer, enables you to print OMR forms on plain paper. These forms can be scanned with ScanTools Plus with the optional ScanFlex module and a Scantron OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20, iNSIGHT 30, or OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging) scanner.

R RealTime Character Recognition

record

record format response position

response position string

User’s Guide

An optional ScanTools Plus module that, with a Scantron OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20, iNSIGHT 30, or OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging) scanner, enables you to scan and recognize machine printed and hand printed text. A record is a collection of fields that contain related information and are treated as a unit for data processing purposes. For example, a record might contain the fields Name, Age, Occupation, and Address where the information in these fields applies to the same person. A record format specifies how fields and character constants are arranged as part of a record. A response position is a circle or oval that can be marked (“filled-in”) on a form to represent information. A response position is sometimes called a “bubble.” The set of response positions on a form that are used to represent a single character. Usually no more than one response position in a string may be marked.

323

Appendix D: Glossary run number–sheet thickness

run number

The run number is a user-specified number that identifies a set of documents that are scanned together in the same scanning run.

S ScanFlex

An optional ScanTools Plus module that, with a Scantron OpScan iNSIGHT 70/150, 5000i, iNSIGHT 20, iNSIGHT 30, or OpScan iNSIGHT 2/4 (with Imaging) scanner, enables you to scan OMR forms manufactured using a wide variety of printing technologies, and printed on plain paper.

ScanFlex alignment guide

A clear plastic tool that enables you to test your OMR forms to verify that they can be processed with ScanTools Plus with ScanFlex software. The ScanFlex Alignment Guide is provided with both ScanTools Plus with ScanFlex and Scantron DesignExpert with PrintFlex software products.

scanner mark threshold score profile

See mark threshold. A set of rules used by ScanTools Plus software to score the data collected during scanning, or later when scoring is performed on a data file.

sheet

A single piece of paper on which data has been entered (can be one side or both sides). Documents can be composed of more than one sheet.

sheet thickness

Scanners support forms which vary in thickness (measured by weight and thousandths of an inch). Knowing the thickness of the form is important when adjusting the scanner's feed mechanism. A feed mechanism that is not set correctly may result in either double-sheet picking or slippage. Adjusting sheet thickness to the correct setting is scanner dependent. In ScanTools Plus applications, you can define the expected thickness of each sheet in a document.

324

ScanTools Plus

Appendix D: Glossary skew marks–test

NOTE: The EZData scanner does not support sheet

thickness checking.

skew marks

The small black ovals printed on a sheet that provide additional skew detection to the scanning software. They are designed to detect paper stretch problems due to lack of proper paper conditioning or other reasons. Skew marks are optional. In ScanTools applications, you define the skew mark locations on each side of each sheet.

sticky field

An output field attribute that causes the content of the field to be written to all subsequent document records (it “sticks” in the field) until replaced by another document record using this field. This enables you to mark output records in batches of documents.

subtest

A grouping of questions on a test. Groupings are typically organized by the subject, theme, or learning objective the group is being used to test.

summation field

An output field attribute where the data from a grid is created by summing the numerical values of all marked responses. Each response is translated to a numerical value (character string) defined in a translate table. Two or more response positions can be marked, allowing numerical values to be entered with a minimum of response positions. The grid for a summation field must be a single column or a single row.

T tally field

test

User’s Guide

An output field attribute that causes ScanTools to collect information about the mark quality of the grid corresponding to this field. Data from this and other tally fields are used by ScanTools to calculate a Worst Mark Intensity Factor (WMIF) and Invalid Response Count (IRC) for the document. These figures are written in the NCS Header of the document record. A form used to mark choices from among alternative answers to test questions. A test typically consists of 325

Appendix D: Glossary thresholding–translate

several questions, which require responses from the test taker by marking or filling in small circles (bubbles, ovals, or rectangles) representative of the response of their choice for each question. thresholding

timing track (timing marks) translate

Determining the proper point for converting grayscale images to black and white in order to get the optimum bitone images. This can be done by either manual adjustment or automatic means. The Dynamic Threshold feature, also known as HAPI (Histogrammic Adjustment Per Image), allows the image scanner and ScanTools software to provide automated thresholding that will cover a wide variety of forms without requiring human intervention to gain the optimum thresholding point. For image scanners only. A row of black rectangles along the edge of a form that enable the scanner to locate response positions. Each position in a response grid is translated to one or more characters defined in a translate table in the ScanTools Plus application. The following are system translate tables provided in every ScanTools Plus application: • • • • •

Alphabetic, no space Alphanumeric Numeric One-digit response Two-digit response

By design, every translate table name is displayed as a Type in the OMR tool in all documents within the application. Using the translate tool, you can create your own custom translate tables in addition to the ones provided by ScanTools Plus software. You can also import translate tables from a different application into the currently open application.

326

ScanTools Plus

Appendix D: Glossary transport printer–UNC

transport printer

A hardware option on some scanners that enables data to be printed on a form while it is being scanned.

U UNC

Universal Naming Convention or Uniform Naming Convention. A UNC path name is one that starts with “\\server name” rather than with a mapped drive letter. UNC paths specify the name of a particular computer and a particular directory or resource to be accessed. The name of the computer is prefaced with two backslashes, while the directory or resource is prefaced with one. For example, \\SERVER1\VOL1. For iNAME image archiving and iNAME Merge, write privileges to the root of the UNC path are required if UNC directory paths are specified in the iNAME configuration. Either the application user running the iNAME operation must have these write privileges or power user privileges must be included in the iNAME configuration. See online help.

User’s Guide

327

Appendix D: Glossary UNC–UNC

NOTES

328

ScanTools Plus

I Index Numerics 1- or 2- digit field data types . . . . . . . . . 248, 304 801 sample application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 257

archiving, see image archiving associating a grid with a field . . . . . . . . . 207, 279 automatically edit a data file . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

A

B

action bar, ScanTools Plus window . . . . . . . .99 Add Table button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290 Add Translate Table dialog box . . . . . . 228, 290 alignment guide (ScanFlex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 image archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 alphabetic (no space), OMR grid type . . . . . . . 76 alphanumeric, OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Append command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 279 application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 264 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 271 options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 195, 271 application disk, making . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 application module, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Application Settings dialog box . . . . . . . 187, 264 Archive Image Scaling radio buttons . . . . . . 312 archiving image clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155–156 User’s Guide

background form image 176, 192, 208, 268, 280 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 266 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 257, 312 background merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Bar Code Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 bar code, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 batch, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 BCD (binary coded decimal), OMR grid type 77 bias bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 313 binary (scoring), OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . 78 binary with parity, OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . 78 binary, OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 binary-coded decimal, OMR grid type . . . . . . 77 bitone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 sequence check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

C change edit profile values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 character, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 checking image orientation . . . . . . . . . . 189, 265 clip attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 329

Index settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Clip Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 clip images of failed fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 clip region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 enlarged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 for linked grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 296 clipping sparse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 whole sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Clipping Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Combine with Form check box . . . . . . . . . . . 218 comments field and grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 communications errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 configuration settings scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 setting directories (paths) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 configuration sheet, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 configuring the context file bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 scanning options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 confirmations, application option . . . . . . . . . . 79 context file, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 context, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 conversion profile change parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 create a copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 output formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 converting data changing parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . 152 conversion profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 conversion profile window . . . . . . . . . . 148 converting an existing data file . . . . . . . 153 creating a conversion profile . . . . . . . . . 150 field delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 header record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 modifying a conversion profile . . . . . . . 150 output formats for converted files . . . . . 143 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 post-scan converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 record delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 text envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Copy command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 296 330

corrections, making . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 creating a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 189, 265 creating an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 264 application options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 custom application development/service . . 252, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 start application definition . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 creating an output format . . . . . . . . 86, 194, 270 Ctrl+c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 296 Ctrl+v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 296 custom application development . . . . . 252, 308 customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 cutoff value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

D data editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 data file defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 data type, user defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290 date field, defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 287 defining a clip region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 a clip region for linked grids . . . . . . . . . 235 a date field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 287 a field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 201, 273 a grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 a grid using copy and paste . . . . . . 237, 296 a grid using the background form image method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 276 a grid using the outline method . . . 211, 284 a score field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 304 a translate table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290 linked grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 294 deleting an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Delimited ASCII (.DLM, .TXT, or .CSV), output formats for converted data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 designator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 276 DesignExpert importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 174 dialog box, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 display field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 273 document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 257 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 189, 265 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 314 ScanTools Plus

Index importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 sequence record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 domain resolution, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 DOSSIER (.DSA or .DSE), output formats for converted data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 dropout colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 280

E edit correction dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 edit corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 edit profile change values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 changing edit profile values . . . . . . . . . . 116 creating a copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 creating a new edit profile . . . . . . . . . . . 117 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 modify an existing edit profile . . . . . . . . 115 Edit Selected Grid button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 editing a specific document record . . . . . . . . 124 editing data clip images of failed fields . . . . . . . . . . . 113 creating a new edit profile . . . . . . . 110, 117 edit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 editing a specific document record . . . . 124 flag failed records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 making corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 manually editing a data file . . . . . . . 111, 124 Modify Data File window . . . . . . . . . . . 124 modifying an existing edit profile . 110, 115 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 post-scan editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 119 print a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 reject failed records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 selecting a data file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 selecting the failing sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 starting the edit cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 stop on failing field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 using an edit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Enable Background Fix check box . . . . . . . . 198 Enable Black Removal check box . . . . . . . . . 198 enlarged clip region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 error, scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

F failed fields, clip images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 features of a form (sheet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 field defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 273, 316 User’s Guide

defining a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 201, 273 delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 field data types scoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 304 file bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 316 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 File Name Suffix text box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Fix Light Background Images . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 fixed length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 221, 273, 287 Fixed Length Records (.SDF), output formats for converted data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 flag failed records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Flip Image/Booklet Page check box . . 191, 267 For . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 form defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 form ID marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 265, 316 Form ID Matching option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 formula scoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 full sheet image archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

G General Purpose Answer Sheet . . . . . . 184, 254 glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 graybox (ICR/OCR), defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 (standard), defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Graybox ICR/OCR Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 grid clip region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 defined . . . . . . . . . . 201, 204, 273, 276, 317 defining a . . . . . . . . . 87, 204, 211, 276, 284 defining using copy and paste . . . . 237, 296 OMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 276 grid types, OMR alphabetic, no space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 alphanumeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 binary (scoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 binary with parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 binary-coded decimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Litho-code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 331

Index procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 software component selection . . . . . . . . . 40

one-digit response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 two-digit response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 guide edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

H header record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 help calling for customer support . . . . . . . . . . 12 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

I IBM 3881 (.ASC or .EBC), output formats for converted data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ICR/OCR, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 image header field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 orientation, checking . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 265 rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 266 image archiving alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 application definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 background merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 directory path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 full sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 iNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 image clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 197 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 for grids, bar codes, and grayboxes . . . . . 74 Image Clips dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 importing a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 DesignExpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 iNAME see also image archiving configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 161 image archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 318 iNAME Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 318 application definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 installing an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 installing ScanTools Plus auto-start issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 license key entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 332

K key

data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 from image (KFI) . . . . . . . 74, 197, 244, 319

L leading edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 linked grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 294 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 294, 319 literal defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 litho-code defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

M making corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 making an application disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 manually editing a data file . . . . . . 111, 113, 124 mark all that apply field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 field (left justify) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 mark style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 276 mark threshold, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 menu bar, ScanTools Plus window . . . . . . . . . 99 merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 metric units for paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Microsoft Visual Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 migrating applications from earlier versions of ScanTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 from ScanTools (16-bit Windows) . . . . . 29 from ScanTools II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 from ScanTools II, DOS environment . . 29 mod 10 edit, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 modify an existing application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 an existing edit profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Modify Data File window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 moving between records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 multiple, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

ScanTools Plus

Index

N navigation during editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 NCS Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 New Data File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 New Document window . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 269 New Output Format dialog . . . . . . . . . . 194, 270 numeric, OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

O omit, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 OMR from image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 from scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 276 grid types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 OMR Tool dialog box . . . 71, 204, 211, 276, 284 one digit response, OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . 78 online edit correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 322 optical mark recognition (OMR) defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 276 outline method (for defining a grid) . . . 211, 284 Output Field Entry dialog box . . . 202, 274, 281 output field, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 output format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 270 application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

P paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 parts of an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Paste command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 296 path, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 phantom clips, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 plain paper printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 post-scan archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 post-scan editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 119 automatically editing a data file . . . . . . . 120 selecting edit options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 user exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 post-scan scoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 180 preslug, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 PrinFlex User’s Guide

guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 print a message about failed fields . . . . . . . . 114 PrintFlex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 174 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 printing forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 printing online help topics, help printing topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

R read controls, application option . . . . . . . . . . 80 RealTime Character Recognition . 2, 33, 49, 69, 73, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 323 record delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 record format, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 record, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 registering the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 registration, online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 reject failed records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Release for scanning check box . . . . . . 250, 306 Remove Black from Background . . . . . . . . . 198 removing ScanTools Plus software . . . . . . . . . 49 Replace button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 response position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 response position string, defined . . . . . . . . . 323 rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 199, 266 run number, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

S sample application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 257 saving the application . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 195, 271 saving to disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Scan Sheet button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 280 ScanFlex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 173, 324 alignment guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 324 background form images . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 177 printing forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 scanner configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 scanner mark threshold, see mark threshold scanning a sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 280 scanning documents configuring the context . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 edit correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 edit errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 333

Index procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 scanner errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ScanTools Plus window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 scanning user exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 scan-time archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 see also image archiving ScanTools Plus calling for help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 converting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 creating an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 data file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 migrating earlier applications . . . . . . . . . . 25 modifying an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 system requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 uninstall (removal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 upgrading from earlier versions . . . . . . . . 22 Scantron DesignExpert importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 174 score field, defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 304 score profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 create a copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 324 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 score, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 304 scoring an existing data file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 scoring data changing parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . 136 creating a score profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 field data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 304 modifying a score profile . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 post-scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 score profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 score profile window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 selecting a data file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 an output format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 edit options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 the failing sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 334

sequence, application option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 setting clip attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 sheet jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 thickness, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Sheet Image Diagnostic tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 sheet, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 skew marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 103, 325 sparse clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 199 SPSS for Windows (.SPS and .DA1), output formats for converted data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 starting the edit cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 sticky field, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 stop the scanner on a failing field . . . . . . . . . 114 subtest, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 summation field, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 support, web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 supported scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 system, ScanTools help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 systems requirements, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

T tally field, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 test, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 text envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 thresholding, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 timing marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 189, 265, 326 timing track, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 training services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 308 translate defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 translate table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290 defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290 Translate Tool dialog box . . . . . . . . 74, 228, 290 transport printer, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 tutorial image scanner application . . . . . . . 183, 253 prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 254 two digit response defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 287 OMR grid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

U UNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Undo Grid Definition button 206, 212, 278, 285 uninstalling ScanTools Plus software . . . . . . . 49 ScanTools Plus

Index upgrading from earlier versions of ScanTools 22 user defined data type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 290 user exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 development service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 179 post-scan editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 post-scan scoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

User’s Guide

W web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 whole sheet clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 199 window, ScanTools Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Y Y2K Compliant (.Y2K), output formats for converted data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

335

Index

NOTES

336

ScanTools Plus

®

Scantron Corporation Toll free: (800) 338-5544 www.scantron.com ©2008-2009 Copyright Scantron Corporation. All rights reserved. Publication Number 203 583 133

ScanTools Plus User's Guide

Recommend Documents